Home

DDN SFA10000/10000E V1.4.2 User Guide

1. Disk Enclosure 1 Disk Enclosure 11 I O Module A I O Module B I O Module A 1 O Module B 000 020 050 120 150 031 055 131 155 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 26 Cable Connections Figure 28 Connecting 5 x S2460 Enclosures to SFA10000 Controllers Controller 0 Controller 1 Disk Enclosure 1 I O Module A 1 O Module B 000 Disk Enclosure 2 I O Module A 1 0 Module B 002
2. 2 5 4 Management Network Connection You may remotely monitor the system over your Ethernet network Connect the controllers to your network using the Ethernet port as shown in Figure 33 The Ethernet management port supports 10 100 and 1000BASE T rates Figure 33 Ethernet Connections to Your Network Controller Your Management Network 2 5 5 RS 232 Console Connection Connect a null modem cable between a PC and the RS 232 connector on the back of the controller Figure 34 The RS 232 console is used to configure the management network ports during initial configuration It can also be used to log the console output and upgrade the BIOS BMC CONFIG firmware Figure 34 Connect RS 232 Console to Controller Controller RS 232 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 31 Cable Connections 2 5 6 UPS Connection 1 For each controller verify that a USB cable is attached to the port on the back of the controller and its UPS as shown in Figure 35 2 For each controller verify that the two power cables are attached to the controller s power supplies and its UPS as shown in Figure 35 Figure 35 Connect
3. 000 DOSOOOOOLOONOOLOOLEOOOCOOI A i we A m Pm m PLA Ao DOG OOO000000000000000000 HE HoooooD00000000000000000 FOGE00L00000000000000 A000000000000000000000000000 LEE DOCOOI OOOOO000000000 paana SEA eee 990 BSS9B90969000 DO oppooo 10 oooooooooooo oo N OOEOP0O0E00000000000000000000 pg E i oot Terre GobbCOEOOE BEAG0000000 ee HINO oo ogooro OOO0000000 I m O0EEAACTHHAHE HE 3 QOOO0ORO OOO0000000 q I E BSeeEdeee Geese 1 mmm D Dia aa mA a COOOOOCNI Edda o go0000000000 00 ooopocoo OO 4 m A0000000Q00000000000000 oorororoni Go fe ma 2000000000000 OOOJSEC0L gt Bo pf T J T IBE N S O O O S S O E a E m a po O ooOO0OO0000000 00 O00 0000 oy on O L l In 1 L vy omron 0 oq 5 OO0090000 0 i LA a Se Power Supply Ethernet USB A Ports aoe Disk Channels Module 2 Ports Ports Client Channels Port Figure 5 SFA10000E Controller Rear View Power Supply Module 1 Host Ports Disk Channels IB Inter Controller Link ooo
4. L J0 OBBBBOO You may now configure the system as described in Section 2 7 Configuring the SFA10000 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 34 Configuring the SFA10000 2 7 Configuring the SFA10000 This section provides information on configuring your SFA10000 NOTE The configuration examples provided here represent only a general guideline These examples should not be used directly to configure your particular SFA10000 The CLUI Command Line User Interface commands used in these examples are fully documented in Chapter 3 however exact commands may change depending on your firmware version To access the most up to date commands use the CLUI s online HELP feature The CLUI commands are independent of case Most of the keywords can be abbreviated and most of the punctuations are optional For example SHOW CON LO ALL is adequate for SHOW CONTROLLER LOCAL ALL ATTRIBUTES 2 7 1 Planning Your Setup and Configuration Before proceeding to configure the storage settings for the SFA10000 it is necessary to understand the basic organization of the system The SFA10000 uses storage pools and virtual disks to configure disk storage for use by the hosts A storage pool sometimes referred to as a RAID group is a collection of 2 to 10 physical disks ideally of the same capacity and type In RAID 5 the capacity of one disk is reserved for parity allowing data recover
5. Disk Enclosure 3 I O Module A 1 0 Module B 010 Disk Enclosure 4 I O Module A 1 0 Module B 012 Disk Enclosure 5 I O Module A 1 0 Module B 040 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 27 Cable Connections Figure 29 Connecting 5 x SS6000 Enclosures to SFA10000E Controllers Controller 0 Controller 1 Disk Enclosure 1 I O Module A I O Module B 022 122 Disk Enclosure 2 I O Module A I O Module B 020 120 Disk Enclosure 3 I O Module 032 Disk Enclosure 4 I O Module A I O Module B 030 130 Disk Enclosure 5 I O Module A I O Module B 042 142 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 28 Cable Connections Figure 30 Connecting 10 x SS6000 Enclosures to SFA10000E Controlle
6. NOTE Ensure the colon is at the end of the above command Enter the password case sensitive Firmware DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 143 Firmware Update 5 4 4 2 Windows Environment Firmware Upload Obtain the firmware from DDN 1 Use the putty secured copy program pscp to transfer the file to the controller with the command pscp lt firmware file name gt firmware lt ip address of primary controller gt NOTE Ensure the colon is at the end of the above command 2 Enter the password case sensitive Firmware The file is copied to the primary controller 5 4 4 3 Physical Disk Upgrade Once the file is copied from either procedure above Linux or Windows follow the steps below to complete the upgrade 1 Login to the primary controller User name is user Password is user 2 Shut down the secondary controller by entering the command SHUTDOWN CONTROLLER REMOTE 3 Set subsystem offline by entering the command SET SUBSYSTEM OFFLINE NOTE Thesubsystem must be offline before proceeding with the remaining steps 4 At the CLUI prompt enter command UPDATE PD FILE lt file name uploaded gt The firmware will be updated on any physical disks that match the Vendor Id Product Id and Drive Type SAS SATA in the file The upgrade time varies but typically takes less than a minute For example RAID 0 update pd file WD2002FYPS 05D07 DDN
7. Controller 0 InfiniBand Cable Ethernet Cable 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 22 Cable Connections 2 5 2 Disk Enclosure Cabling The SFA10000 systems are shipped with the cables attached between the disk enclosures and controller s I O channels NOTE Incorrect wiring can prevent the system from operating correctly or from operating at all Verify that the disk enclosures are correctly connected to the two controllers using the figures listed in the tables below The cables are labeled by ports to which they will be connected In the illustrations the port numbers are colored to aid in locating matching cables SFA10000 configurations using SS6000 enclosures Figure 25 Five enclosures Figure 26 Ten enclosures Figure 27 Twenty enclosures SFA10000 configurations using SS7000 enclosures that contain either SAS disk
8. NOTE Even with Background Verify Scan disabled an AUTO VERIFY FORCE will be run automatically when either a Cache Data Lost or Critical Pool condition is cleared This is done to force the pool s data and parity to be consistent Note that this can change either a data member or a parity member When a pool goes into a Critical condition it is an indication that there was possibly an event which adversely impacted user data To enable or disable the automatic background pool verifies use the command SET SUBSYSTEM VERIFY POLICY TRUE FALSE To specify the verify scan priority for a storage pool use the command SET POOL lt pool id gt VERIFY POLICY lt 0 99 gt where the number range lt 1 99 gt indicates the internal resources to use for the process 0 is to disable background verify for this pool To initiate an one time verify scan use the command VERIFY POOL lt pool id gt NOTE Do NOT use the VERIFY POOL FORCE_CONSISTENCY command as a manual process since it will run at the highest priority and will have significant impact on host I O performance until the process is complete 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 63 Storage Pool Management 335 Storage Pool Initialization When a storage pool is created initialization begins automatically and will continue in the background until it is completed You may use the SHOW POOL command to check if the stora
9. NOTE Storage pool initialization is a background process and multiple storage pools can be initialized simultaneously However virtual disks on a storage pool are NOT accessible until its initialization is complete You may assign a name to a storage pool using the command SET POOL lt pool id gt NAME lt pool name gt To view the list of configured storage pools enter the SHOW POOL command Figure 50 Figure 50 Show Pool Information Screen RAID 0 show pool Total Free Max Disk Global Spare Idx Name State Chunk Raid Faults cap GB cap GB VD GB Settings Jobs T O spare pool Policy 0 pool 0 NORMAL 128 2 4104 0 0 W RFI 10 UNASSIGNED AUTO 1 pool 1 NORMAL 128 5 4104 0 0 W RET 10 UNASSIGNED AUTO 2 pool 2 NORMAL 128 5 4104 0 0 W RET 10 UNASSIGNED AUTO 3 pool 3 NORMAL 128 5 6192 0 0 W REIT 10 UNASSIGNED AUTO Total Storage Pools 4 To display the detailed information of a storage pool use the SHOW POOL lt id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES command Figure 51 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 42 2 7 10 96 00259 001 Figure 51 Show Pool All_Attributes Example Screen KKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK gt Pool s KKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK Index OID Type Name Chunk Size Block Size RAID Type Max VD Size Total Capacity UUID Global Spare Pool DiskTimeout FRT Init Policy Init Priority Verify Priority Sparing Policy Verify Policy Assign
10. NOTE You may ONLY presenta virtual disk ONCE to the same host object You can present a virtual disk to multiple hosts however this is dangerous If doing so presenting them as Read Only to the other hosts Warning Would be appropriate NOTE You may present a virtual disk to ALL hosts This may be appropriate in some limited system environments however it is best practice to not MIX the presentations where some VDs are selectively presented while others are presented all Managing at the host end may become confusing To present a virtual disk to ALL hosts promiscuous mode use the command APPLICATION CREATE PRESENTATION VD lt VD id gt HOST ALL NOTE The promiscuous mode may not be used with persistent reservations The above setting will cause SCSI2 3 Reservation commands to fail 3 6 6 1 Create Host Object The following example demonstrates presenting 6 virtual disks to 3 separate hosts 2 Windows hosts and a Linux host from a single storage subsystem Although this configuration will have a FC Switch the steps are identical NOTE In the example below the CLUI is operating in the RAID subject mode The ASM Application Stack Management commands must be preceded by the subject application Examples RAID 1 application create host name co lsl ostype Linux HOST 301 OID 0x1ld5e012d creation STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 1 application create host name co test d10 ostype windows HOST 3
11. at the end of the command will automatically reissue the command until a key is depressed You can watch the upgrade status without having to re enter the command 7 Verify if the update is completed enter the command SHOW ENCLOSURE lt id gt UPDATE FIRMWARE PROGRESS For example RAID 0 show enclosure I update firmware progress ES download progress for enclosure 1 Download not in progress last download completed successfully 8 When the download is completed shut down both controllers by entering the command SHUTDOWN SUBSYSTEM Then power cycle all the disk enclosures NOTE Make sure the power is left off for at least 30 seconds after the power down or the controller may not boot up correctly the first time 9 Verify that the upgrade was successful by entering the command SHOW EXPANDER NOTE The expanders are Sub Index 3 thru 10 Ensure that the Firmware version and the Init String version are identical If the Firmware version field indicates VARIOUS this indicates that the expanders i e the DEMs have not accepted the update You will need to power cycle the enclosure again to try and clear this condition If the VARIOUS state still exists after the second power cycle you will need to re run the update procedure 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 141 96 00259 001 For example RAID 0 show expander 1 all Sub Index Sub OID Enclos
12. 213 96 00259 001 Configuring the SFA10000 Serial Interface Configuration 1 Onthe PC that is connected to the controller load serial console program Such as HyperTerminal minicom and screen and use the following settings for the serial connection Bits per second 115 200 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control None 2 Once connected press the lt Enter gt key to bring up the login prompt Enter the user name user and password user Validate the Hardware 1 Enter SHOW ENCLOSURE ALL Figure 40 Show Enclosure Status KKKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK Enclosure s KKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KK KKK Index 0 Enclosure 0x50000000 Type CONTROLLER Logical ID 0x0001 0801c90000 Vendor ID DDN Product ID SFA10000 Revision 0000 Zones 0 Zoning Configuration 0 Fault Indicator OFF Predicted Failure Ind OFF Locate Indicator OFF Baseboard part number B48 DTIAAD6G00D100 Baseboard serial number 33759 1017 00200 Baseboard date 20091005 Chassis part number X3B70W50A81XXXXXXP Chassis serial number 516 100427003000 BIOS version GEMDV240 BMC version DDGENO50 BMC config JANUSC23 Firmware version 1 4 2 lt j _ _ Controller Firmware Version Index 1 Enclosure 0x50000001 Type DISK Logical ID 0x50001 210030000 Vendor ID DDN Product ID 557000 Revision 0402 Zones 2 lt Zones Setting Zoning Configuration 1 Fault Indicator OFF Predi
13. Encl Slot Vendor Product ID Type Cap GB RPM Revision Serial Number Pool State Idx State WWN 2 53 HITACHI HUS153030VLS300 SAS 279 15K A410 JHVYKUKC5303 14 SPARE 648 NORM 5000cca00d35c6b0 2 58 HITACHI HUS153030VLS300 SAS 279 15K A410 JHVWUS4C5303 14 SPARE 652 NORM 5000cca00d3291 4 Total Physical Disks Total Assigned Disks Total Unassigned Disks Total SAS Disks Total Member State Normal 2 NONN 3 5 2 Creating a Spare Pool Use these commands to create a spare pool add disks to the spare pool and assign the spare pool to a storage pool e CREATE SPARE POOL e ASSIGN PHYSICAL DISK lt disk id gt TO POOL lt spare pool id gt e SET POOL lt pool id gt SPARE POOL lt spare pool id gt where lt pool id gt and lt spare pool id gt are the index names of the storage pool and spare pool respectively 3 5 3 Naming a Spare Pool To specify a name to identify the spare pool use the command SET SPARE POOL lt pool id gt NAME lt name gt 3 5 4 Deleting a Spare Pool To delete a disk from the spare pool you need to move assign the disk to the unassigned pool Enter the command ASSIGN PHYSICAL DISK lt disk id gt TO POOL 0x1800ffff To delete a spare pool enter the command DELETE S PARE POOL lt pool id gt 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 70 Presentations 3 6 Presentations NOTE For SFA10000E this feature is not applicable A Presentation
14. Figure 169 Removing the UPS Bezel 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 150 UPS Maintenance 2 Disconnect the battery pack connector Figure 170 Figure 170 Disconnecting the Battery Pack Connector 3 Slide the battery pack cover to the right and pull it off Figure 171 Set aside the battery pack cover Figure 171 Removing the Battery Pack Cover ee a z s 4 Pull the battery pack out and place it on a flat stable surface Figure 172 CAUTION Note that the battery pack weighs 20 pounds Be sure to support the battery pack as you pull it out of the UPS Figure 172 Pulling Out the Battery Pack 5 Slide the new battery pack into the UPS 6 Reinstall the battery pack cover 7 Connect the battery pack connector 8 Reinstall the UPS bezel 9 Ifyou shut down the controller to change the battery pack turn on the UPS to restart the controller 10 Initialize the UPS battery life remaining feature a Login to the controller that is connected to the UPS with the new battery Issue the command SHOW UPS ALL 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 151 UPS Maintenance b Ifa battery manufacturing date is displayed do nothing more However if the battery manufacturing date and life remaining are not available as shown below proceed to Step c Battery Mfg Date NOT AVAILABLE Battery Life Remaining NOT AVA
15. Figure 200 Slide Assembly 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 182 Rack Installation Procedure 4 Align the front bracket with the mounting holes in rack Figure 201 Optional Remove metal spacer for aluminum racks Figure 201 Attach Slides to Rack 1 vi U oO E 3 E E 3 lt 8 ou 1 oO Q N T U v gt e v a E S 2 Q Metal Spacer 5 Push the front bracket onto rack Figure 202 Optional M6x10L screws can be used to secure the rails with posts if needed Figure 202 Attach Slides to Rack 2 d L Y N o x Ko T c o 2 Q O DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 183 96 00259 001 Rack Installation Procedure 6 Similarly attach the end bracket to the rear of rack Figure 203 Figure 203 Attach Slides to Rack 3 p Lg End Bracket HSH ache aheharar 1B BERE 7 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 184 Rack Installation Procedure 7 Slide the two inner rails onto the chassis hooks on both sides of the controller Figure 204 Figure 204 Attach Inner Rails to Chassis 8 Secure the inner rails using
16. If you convey a covered work knowingly relying on a patent license and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy free of charge and under the terms of this License through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means then you must either 1 cause the Corresponding Source to be so available or 2 arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work or 3 arrange in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License to extend the patent license to downstream recipients Knowingly relying means you have actual knowledge that but for the patent license your conveying the covered work in a country or your recipient s use of the covered work in a country would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid If pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement you convey or propagate by procuring conveyance of a covered work and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use propagate modify 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide viii Important Information or convey a specific copy of the covered work then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it A patent license is discriminatory if it does not include
17. Systems using five 60 bay disk enclosures 2 Enter SHOW PHYSICAL DISK Verify that all the disks can be seen and the Health State fields show GOOD Figure 41 If the disks are not visible type SHUTDOWN SUBSYSTEM RESTART to reboot the controllers Figure 41 Show Physical Disk Status RAID 0 show pd Health Encl Slot Vendor siirss State Idx State 1 1 HITACHI a 2 HITACHI 232222 1 3 HITACHI GOOD 6 NORM rrr GOOD 1 NORM frrrt GOOD 5 NORM i i Total Physical Disks 300 Total Assigned Disks 0 Total Unassigned Disks 300 Total SAS Disks 300 Total Member State Normal 300 3 Enter SHOW FAN Verify that no fan faults are found 4 Enter SHOW POWER Verify that the AC Fail and DC Fail states are false 5 Enter SHOW TEMPERATURE Verify that all the temperature sensors do not report over temperature conditions 6 Enter SHOW UPS ALL Verify that the UPS batteries are healthy Figure 42 Also take note of the charge level as the battery may take several hours to fully charge Verify that the UPS firmware versions match the measured voltages noted down in Section 2 2 5 AC Power Supply Planning and Verification If these are incorrect then have a DDN field engineer correct them If either voltage X G or voltage Y G is less than 10 volts then the UPS firmware version should be Cont 01 20 Inve 01 02 Ifboth voltages X G
18. e Chunk Size CHUNK SIZE The chunk size in KiB blocks defines the amount of data written to a single disk before proceeding to the next disk in the storage pool NOTE RAID 1 is a two member RAID set where the data is mirrored on each disk There is no parity hence the chunk size is fixed Disk Count NUMBER A RAID 1 storage pool consists of 2 physical disks A RAID 5 storage pool may consist of 5 or 9 physical disks A RAID 6 storage pool may consist of 6 or 10 physical disks Disk Selection PHYSICAL DISK Unless you specify the disks to use the SFA10000 will automatically determine optimal enclosure disk selection to ensure minimized single points of failure In other words vertical striping across disk enclosures so that even the loss of an enclosure will not result in the loss of a storage pool e Drive Type Rotation Rate Capacity ASSIGN POLICY Drive types can be SAS or SATA Rotation rate can be 15000 RPM 10000 RPM 7200 RPM 5400 RPM or SSD For maximum performance select disks with the same characteristics e SATAssure SATASSURE You may disable this feature or enable it to use either the data integrity field option or parity check on read option Initialization Policy INITIALIZE_POLICY Select Allow_IO to allow I O during initialization Select NO IO to disallow I O during initialization Select DONT_CARE to use the default I O policy or current setting To create a storage pool use the CREATE POOL co
19. OOCGOOOOOOOOOOOOEOOOOO 2 lt A A B cg gt 200 HOOO0OSO000000000000 et pr E E Noooooooooooooooo0o0oo SG09090000009 ae al ag G000000000 BABES Eee S0090090000 GAC e gn NVi0000000000 0 S0000000000 BE ra GRR AR aH ooooooooooo00o00oo003o300o0030u aooo I 00000 00 SE000000 l E HHHHHHHHHI mm pooo A05000000 Sakddbadbodbadtodarddod eee NE ao O0000000000000000000000 HHHHHHHGHI OOOO a a a a a a a a a a a I eee bogenooAecnoocacncon a OObOOOCO So000000 Bo090000 I SAGG0000 dl RS 232 Power Supply Ethernet USB P Host Ports Module 2 Ports Ports ort 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 6 The SFA10000 System Hardware 121 Status LED Indicators Figure 6 below illustrates the positions of all the control buttons and LED indicators on the front panel The LEDs are defined in Table 1 The USB port can be used for downloading new firmware and BIOS to the controller Figure 6 Controller Front Panel Control Buttons and Status LED Indicators Management Network Activity LED Ethernet Enclosure Locate Identify Indicator ICL Activity Ethernet ICL Activity Power Indicator On Off Button 2 7 Internal HDD Activity USB Port DO NOT USE Ethernet ICL Activity Ethernet ICL Activity NOTE DoNOT use the Power button under normal operation since doing so may cause data loss If you need to power down the control
20. The configuration version of this firmware does not match the configuration version of that on media To proceed either reload the previous version of firmware and do a backup then upgrade or delete your configuration to continue Use CLEAR SUBSYSTEM CONFIGURATION to create an empty configuration NOTE This creates a new configuration and the old configuration will be deleted if existed MIR_NO_LOAD_CONFIG A configuration could not be loaded from the backend disks Fix the condition that prevents this controller from loading a configuration from the backend disks or use CLEAR SUBSYSTEM MIR_STATE to create an empty configuration Please refer to the installation guidelines for proper setup NOTE This creates a new configuration and the old configuration will be deleted if existed DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 133 Firmware Update 5 4 Firmware Update DataDirect Networks periodically releases firmware updates to enhance features of the products Please contact DDN Technical Support to obtain the latest firmware files Before performing any updates please note the following e The UPDATE ENCLOSURE command starts a background operation so that the CLUI is free to do other operations during the UPDATE The status that comes back from the UPDATE ENCLOSURE command only indicates whether the background operation was successfully started SHOW ENCLOSURE lt id gt UPDATE FIRMWARE PROGRESS should be used i
21. 0800a30000000000030000000 Subsystem Time Tue Oct 18 6 26 39 2011 Locate Dwell Time 120 seconds Fast Timeout ON Pool Verify Policy ENABLED NTP Mode ON 10 32 16 24 10 32 16 25 10 32 16 26 10 32 16 27 Drive Error Tolerance HIGH Single Controller WB ENABLED Coupled Crash ENABLED If you are not using NTP you can set the time of both controllers using the SET SUBSYSTEM DATE AND TIME command However once the time is set the time on the two controllers is free to drift independent of the other controller To change the date and time to March 1 2011 2 15 pm for example type SET SUBSYSTEM DATE AND TIME 2011 3 1 14 15 NOTE If NTP mode is enabled the SET SUBSYSTEM DATE AND TIME command will fail with a status of Setting date time while in NTP mode i Configure Network Interface Settings The SFA10000 can be configured and administered either via serial connection using the supplied serial cable or via Ethernet connection using SSH However in order to use the SSH connection it is first necessary to configure the network settings on each controller This can only be done using the serial interface as described below 1 Enter the command UI SET NETWORK INTERFACE LOCAL 0 IP ADDRESS lt ip address gt IP MASK lt netmask gt IP GATEWAY lt gateway gt where lt ip address gt is an address appropriate to the local network The netmask and gateway values can also be entered Figure 46 Figure 46
22. 5 Power up the system 6 Verify zoning configuration on disk enclosures 7 Validate the hardware 8 Configure the network interface settings via the RS 232 console 9 For SFA10000 configure the storage create storage pools virtual disks spare pools and presentations For SFA10000E use either a VNC viewer or SSH to access the preconfigured Virtual Machines 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 14 Site Preparation 2 2 Site Preparation This section provides information on how to prepare a site prior to installing a SFA10000 system The site preparation steps include e Delivery route verification e Rack location air flow and access e Floor loading e Cooling supply planning e AC power supply planning and verification 2271 Delivery Route Verification Each SFA10000 system consists of one to two 19 racks Each of these racks is shipped in a large crate on a pallet Figure 17 Crate Containing One that weighs between 1000 Ibs 454 55 kg and 1500 Ibs SFA10000 Rack 681 82 kg and measures 53 x 40 x 100 5 1846 mm x 1016 mm x 2553 mm Figure 17 Each crate includes ramp that can be used to remove the rack from the crate pallet jack must be used to move the crate from the delivery vehicle to a flat location that is at least 5 x 12 1 52 m x 3 66 m where the ramp can be installed and the rack can be rolled out of the crate Due to the weight of the crate it i
23. Index LUN Only Only 02480 co lsl 00304 00049 060 OFF R W 02481 co lsl 00304 00050 061 OFF R W 02482 co test d10 00305 00051 000 OFF R W 02483 co test d10 00305 00052 001 OFF R W 02484 co test d08 00306 00058 010 OFF R W 02485 co test d08 00306 00059 012 OFF R W Total Presentations 6 Recommendations e At times some hosts may have device discovery issues if there are gaps in the SCSI LUN_ID space Letting the subsystem assign as it will by default the lowest SCSI_ID it can from this subsystem may be considered a best practice e Use ofa host based HBA utility such as HBAnyware or SANsurfer greatly enhances the ability to determine perceived connectivity issues between the storage subsystem and the host e Your hosts multipath driver must be enabled correctly to recognize DDN s Device Hardware ID For Windows Server 2008 the Device Hardware_ID information must be entered into the MPIO stack as an 8 bit 16 character space padded field 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 81 Visual Indications 3 7 Visual Indications The LOCATE command provides a visual indication of the specified components in the subsystem Table 3 below lists the available LOCATE commands and the corresponding components to be identified Table 3 Available LOCATE Commands LOCATE Commands Components to Identify LOCATE CONTROLLER lt id gt The blue Locate LED on
24. Table of Contents 34 Virtual Disk Management wn 24 0 cceeeennec one eeube etneeeeeeduaennoemeganianeaens 66 3 4 1 Display Virtual Disk Information 0 cece eee cece eee e eee ene eens 66 342 Creating a Virtual Disk 4 ceccise sade aeveidsedees riser aes deaaew de de 67 34 3 Naming a Virtual Disk civicciscidsieiaeiecties sia ivelddeigwhotgad isis 67 344 Deleting a Virtual Disk 0 cece een e nen tent enenn ene 68 3 4 5 Presentation to Hosts not applicable to SFA10000E 0 00 0 68 3 5 Spare Pool Management cisc csccd ssrctaetedeeeweasdaeeeeebissaesaneederwertade 69 3 5 1 Display Spare Pool Information 0 cece cece cece eee nen e nee ences 69 3 5 2 Creating Spare Pool cc cecsectee vedas aa a 70 353 Naminga Spare Pool ce cee cece eee rn O KARANTENE KARANE E REANA 70 3 54 Deleting a Spare Pool ununnunennnanennrnnnnnanenerneannanenuenee 70 30 IPIESCNEARIOMNG Leje ped eske 71 3 6 1 Discovered Initiator Commands vwauanenenennanenenenenennanenenener 72 3 6 2 Imported Initiator Commands 0 0c cece cece eee eee nee e eee eens 72 363 Host Commands 2c iccsvscediatiiavsescai eva breas bk A AA ASAA 72 3 6 4 Presentation Commands 0 0 cece cece eee e cece eee eee ee ee eeeanes 72 3 6 4 1 Persistent Reservation Support 6 cece cee eect eee tee e cent teen nena 73 3 6 5 Additional Configuration Considerations for Mac Hosts 5
25. The need for a DEM replacement may have come from an event in an event log the results of a SHOW command an SNMP trap or an email message The event SNMP trap and email message include the element index within its enclosure and the enclosure WWN the outputs of SHOW ENCLOSURE and SHOW EXPANDER have the same information Use these and the SHOW ENCLOSURE command to find the OIDEX of the DEM s enclosure Note that the DEMs in each SS6000 enclosure have expander indexes 3 through 10 indexes 1 and 2 are the I O modules IOM 2 Physically locate the DEM that needs to be replaced First find the ENCLOSURE and then find the EXPANDER within the enclosure If the enclosures have been labeled with their WWNs then find the enclosure whose label matches the results from Step 1 otherwise use the LOCATE ENCLOSURE command with the enclosure OID from Step 1 While you might be able to issue a LOCATE EXPANDER using the enclosure OID from Step 1 it requires that the DEM still be working well enough to light its Locate LED Alternatively SHOW EXPANDER provides the expander location and that corresponds to the label inside the top door of the SS6000 enclosure 3 Identify the IOM that is associated with the failing DEM SHOW EXPANDER gives a location that starts with DEM and ends with either A or B Those DEMs with locations ending in A are associated with IOM 1 and those ending in B are associated with IOM 2 4 Identify the physical controller associa
26. 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 163 Controller Component Failures 9 Determine if a firmware update is required on the replacement controller If the firmware level on the replacement controller is the same as the version installed in the subsystem it will directly become operational after power on and connectivity tests complete successfully If the firmware on the replacement controller has a different version it will power up and boot into a MIR state MIR_VERSION_MISMATCH To clear the MIR state and bring the replacement controller online a firmware update will be required Refer to Section 5 4 2 Controller Firmware Update Procedure for instructions 10 Power up the replacement controller and verify that it becomes correctly operational When matching firmware is installed on the replacement controller it will attempt to join the SFA10000 configuration and validate all cable connections If successful all disks will be recognized by the replacement controller and it will become operational Pools will be rebalanced and moved back to their preferred home RAID processors after a period of up to 10 minutes It is recommended that an SFA10000 support contact review the detailed configuration of the subsystem after controller replacement to validate all key aspects of the status 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 164 Disk Enclosure Component Failures 5
27. This connects all disk slots into one logical enclosure If a change is needed remove the Mylar switch cover with a small pair of tweezers and then use a dental tool to move the switches The tweezers and dental tool can be inserted through the grey bezel air holes If changing the switches with a dental tool proves to be too difficult then the grey bezel can be removed 5 Replace the front bezel and the grey bezel if previously removed 6 Push the enclosure back into the rack 7 Ifzoning configuration has been changed power cycle the enclosure for the change to take effect E 2 SS7000 Enclosures NOTE Change of zoning configuration on a disk enclosure must only be done without I O being handled by the subsystem The disk enclosures must be zoned correctly To verify the current setting issue the command SHOW ENCLOSURE lt id gt ALL Figure 197 Figure 197 Show Enclosure All Example KKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KK KKK s Enclosure s KKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KK KKK Index 1 Enclosure 0x50000001 Type DISK Logical ID 0x50001 210030000 Vendor ID DDN Product ID 557000 Revision 0402 Zones 1 Zoning Configuration 0 Fault Indicator OFF Predicted Failure Ind OFF Locate Indicator OFF Baseboard part number USE13000098RB05D Firmware version 04 02 01 FPGA version 0008 For system configured with ten or twenty SS7000 enclosures the output should show Zones 1 Zoning Configuratio
28. exclusion of implied warranties is not permitted by some jurisdictions this exclusion may not apply to you In no event will DataDirect Network their directors officers employees or agents collectively DataDirect Networks be liable to you for any consequential incidental or indirect damages including damages for loss of business profits business interruption loss of business information and the like arising out of the use or inability to use any DataDirect product or software even if DataDirect Networks has been advised of the possibility of such damages by you Because some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of liability for consequential or incidental damages these limitations may not apply to you DataDirect Networks liability to you for actual damages from any cause whatsoever and regardless of the form of the action whether in contract tort including negligence product liability or otherwise is limited to the sum you paid for the DataDirect product or software Document Number 96 00259 001 Rev E Nov 2011 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide ii Important Information STANDARD WARRANTY Definitions This two year limited warranty applies to the following DataDirect Networks network infrastructure and individual SAN solution components that include Silicon Storage Appliance Hardware Disk Modules RAID Hardware Components Storage Hardware Components and Disk Docking B
29. gt Copyright C lt year gt lt name of author gt This program is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 3 of the License or at your option any later version This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program If not see lt http www gnu org licenses gt Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail If the program does terminal interaction make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode lt program gt Copyright C lt year gt lt name of author gt This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY for details type show w This is free software and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions type show c for details The hypothetical commands show w and show c should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License Of course your program s commands might be different for a GUI interface you would use an about box You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the progr
30. oe MOND men E Min CACHE CACHE 0 FP poo 128 RADE 21784 27360 21784 10 10 3 J P 1 Fo poo 256 RAIDS 2656 3168 2656 10 DIF 9 3 f f 2 TF poo 64 RADE 1248 2112 1248 10 DIF 6 3 Pf vf 3 TF pook3 32 RAIDS 1248 1760 1248 10 DIF 5 3 of f 4 TF pook4 256 RADE 3040 4000 3040 10 DIF 10 3 V J y 5 F poos 32 RAD6 NORMAL 1440 2400 1440 10 DIF 6 3 v v 4 xl DELETE STORAGE POOLS CANCEL 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 117 Virtual Disks Menu 4 7 Virtual Disks Menu A Virtual Disk is the storage unit presented to any attached host A virtual disk can be created to use all or just a part of the capacity of a single storage pool VDs are created in increments of 8 GiB For example 16 GiB of storage space will be allocated when creating a VD of 10 GiB The virtual disk commands are located under the Virtual Disk pull down menu Figure 143 Figure 143 Virtual Disk Menu Virtual Disk Create Virtual Disk Delete Virtual Disk Set Virtual Disk Attributes Show Virtual Disks 4 7 1 Show List of Virtual Disks Select Show Virtual Disks from the Virtual Disk Menu Figure 143 The list of configured virtual disk s appears Figure 144 Click on the individual VD name to display its detailed information Figure 144 Show Virtual Disk Details Screen VIRTUAL DISK SHOW ALL VIRTUAL DISKS INDEX VD NAME POOLNAME STATE RAID CAP GB PREFERRED HOME CURRENT
31. poor RAIDS pool 4 RAID I Pootsj RAIDS KK a4 a4 qq ix iz ix ix 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 116 Storage Pools 4 6 4 Locate Storage Pools To locate the disks in a storage pool select Pools gt Locate Storage Pool At the Locate Pool screen Figure 141 select the storage pool that you want to locate The screen changes accordingly to show the pool s disks Click LOCATE to flash the status LED of those disks Figure 141 Locate Storage Pool Screen STORAGE POOLS LOCATE POOLS DISK WRITE READ INDEX 0 SEN RAID STATE FEDRE KE TIMEOUT SATAssure FNS TUR BACK MIRRORED AHEAD ReACT RE cB cB in CACHE CACHE 0 pool O 128 RADS 21784 273560 21784 10 10 3 s ri ri 1 pool l 256 RAD5 2656 3168 2656 10 DIF 9 3 FG P 2 pool 2 64 RAIDS 1248 2112 1248 10 DIF 6 3 J pr 3 pool 3 32 RAD5 1248 1760 1248 10 DIF 5 3 F Pa 4 pool 4 256 RAIDS 3040 4000 3040 10 DIF 10 3 ov ft x Enclosure 3 Pool pool 0 LOCATE a X 4 6 5 Delete a Storage Pool If you need to delete a storage pool select Pools gt Delete Storage Pool Select the pool that you want to delete Figure 142 Click DELETE STORAGE POOLS to delete that storage pool You will be prompt to confirm deletion click OK to proceed or CANCEL to cancel operation Figure 142 Delete Storage Pool Screen STORAGE POOLS DELETE POOLS noes seor F D OHN na EFN ON mer oe MEN
32. servers 1 Atthe Set Subsystem Attributes screen Figure 118 select ON to enable NTP 2 Inthe IP Addresses for NTP field enter the IP address of the time servers 3 Click UPDATE to save the changes Please refer to Section 3 8 Network Time Protocol Mode on page 83 for information on behavioral changes when NTP mode is enabled 4 222 Locate Time The duration of the identify locate LED blink period is configurable By default the duration is 2 minutes If more time is needed in cases where the subsystem is physically located at a distance from the console it is possible to increase the locate dwell time Valid values are 0 to 65535 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 105 Subsystem Menu 4 2 3 Show Background Jobs To monitor the progress of a job select Subsystem gt Show Background Jobs The Show Background Jobs screen Figure 119 displays the list of current jobs Click on the individual job name to display its detailed information Figure 119 Show Background Job Screen SUBSYSTEM SHOW BACKGROUND JOBS BACKGROUND JOB TYPE STATE TARGET COMPLETION STATUS PRIORITY FRACTION COMPLETED 0x28160006 POOL INIT RUNNING 0x19ab0007 50 13 0x280e0007 POOL INIT RUNNING 0x19ad0008 50 28 BACKGROUND JOB OID 0x28160006 LD INIT RUNNING 0x19ab0007 COMPLETION STATUS PRIORITY FRACTION COMPLETED 4 2 4 Set Background Jobs Attributes The background job rates can be adjusted
33. 0085 MEMBER INDEX 0000 STATE STATE REBUILD Component Name SFA OS Terms in the Log Event Message and Parameters STATE Implements all policy implements the metadata store handles all dual controller issues and controls all other modules ES Enclosure Services Monitors all disk enclosures and its local controller enclosure AMPD and MPI Implements the back end SAS SATA I O controller drivers for access and discovery of Physical Disks and Enclosures CM Cache Manager Implements read and write back cache RAID Implements RAID 5 RAID 6 RAID 1 and rebuilds MAD Data transfer and parity calculations RT Routing Routes VD request to the right CM IOF I O Forwarding Routes PD requests to the right AMPD DUCK Dual controller communication JOI JEX JIPC MIS JTS Infrastructure communication and testing DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 94 The System Logs 3 12 4 Marking Event Logs You may create an event log marker at any time to record a service action undertaken for example To place a mark entry in the controller s event log use the command MARK CONTROLLER lt id gt TEXT string To place a mark entry in the subsystem s event log use the command MARK SUBSYSTEM TEXT string 3 125 Synchronize Log Disks If you need to synchronize the log disks on the controller enter the command SYNCHRONIZE SUBSYSTEM LOG
34. 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 169 A Technical Specifications Here are the technical specifications for the SFA10000 10000E NOTE Specifications subject to change without notice Configuration Performance amp Capacity Host side technology SFA10000 16 8Gb Fibre Channel or 8 40Gb InfiniBand Host side technology SFA10000E 16 individual InfiniBand or 10G Ethernet Disk side technology 40 4 x 3Gb s SAS Supported disk technology SAS SATA SSD Management interface RS 232 and Ethernet SSH Cache memory SFA10000 24GB of RAM 12GB ECC RAID protected cache Cache memory SFA10000E 24GB ECC RAID protected cache Application memory SFA10000E 96GB ECC protected cache Number of disk modules supported Up to 1200 disks 2 4Petabytes per array Number of storage pools supported 256 Number of virtual disks supported 512 64 per storage pool Number of Spare Pools supported 16 Hot spare capability Yes RAID parity protection 1 1 RAID 1 4 1 or 8 1 RAID 5 4 2 or 8 2 RAID 6 Throughput SFA10000 12GB s sustained with large well aligned sequential I O Throughput SFA10000E 6GB s sustained IOPS SFA10000 1M to cache 300 000 to Disk IOPS SFA10000E 500 000 to cache 150 000 to Disk Reliability SES SCSI Enclosure Services protocol support Yes Temperature monitoring Yes Battery backed write back cache Yes Redundant hot swappable power modules Dual redundant 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000
35. 37 DIP Switch Settings on UPS Rear Panel Nominal Input Voltage 208 230 240 Input Voltage Range 198 233 207 243 216 254 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 12 1 2 12 DIP Switches 3 Verify that the power switches on all the power distribution units PDUs are set to OFF 4 Connect the PDUs to your AC power source For maximum redundancy connect the PDUs to different AC circuits 2 6 Powering On the System 1 Switch on all the PDUSs 2 Switch on the power supply modules on all the disk enclosures 3 On both UPS units press and hold the Power button for 2 seconds on the front panel to turn on the units Figure 38 Figure 38 UPS Front Panel Power Button Load Segment 1 LED Power OK LED 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 33 Powering On the System 4 Verify that the Power OK LED on both UPS units turns green and the Load Segment 1 LED turns yellow Figure 38 indicating a successful power application 5 Verify that the Power indicator on both controllers turns green Figure 39 If not press the Power button once 6 Verify that the Fault LED on both controllers is off Figure 39 Figure 39 Controller Front Panel LEDs Power Button Indicator Fault LED
36. 4096 Jul 17 15 31 node_name 4096 Jul 17 15 31 port_id 4096 Jul 17 15 31 port name 4096 Jul 17 15 31 port_state 4096 Jul 17 15 31 port type 4096 Jul 17 15 31 speed 0 Jul 15 11 47 statistics 0 Jul 15 11 48 subsystem gt 4096 Jul 17 15 31 supported classes 4096 Jul 17 15 31 symbolic name 4096 Jul 17 15 31 system hostname 4096 Jul 17 15 31 tgtid bind type 4096 Jul 15 11 47 uevent 0x2100001b3282dc50 Presentations class fc_host NOTE identify which physical connection you are dealing with In switch environments you may disable enable the ports on the switch to Example of showing imported initiators RAID 1 application show initiator Host Index Type Index 00004 FC 00306 00006 FC 00305 00007 FC 00305 00008 FC 00306 00011 FC 00304 00012 FC 00304 Initiato 0x20000000c98107cb 0x20000000c9813a47 0x20000000c9813a46 0x20000000c98107ca 0x2000001b32827e95 0x2001001b32a27e95 r Identifier Utilizing one or more of the techniques above you can document an association between the physical host and the discovered initiators on the storage 0x10000000c98107cb lt a co test d08 0x10000000c9813a47 j co test d10 0x10000000c9813a46 a co test d10 0x10000000c98107ca j co test d08 0x2100001b32827e95 j co Is1 0x2101001b32a27e95 a co ls1 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 78 Presentations 3 6 6 3 Import Discovered Initiators Now
37. 73 3 6 6 Configure Presentations of Virtual Disks to Hosts 0 cece ee eee nee 74 3 6 6 1 Create Host Object srnrnnnnnnnvnnnnnaannnnnennunrrnnnnnnensunnannnnnnenr 75 3 6 6 2 Identifying Host Connections via Ports cc cceeee ee ee et eee eee eee eee 76 3 6 6 3 Import Discovered Initiators 0 cece eee ee eee eee eeeeees 79 3 6 6 4 Present a Virtual Disk to a HOSt 2 cece ccc eee e eee e eee eetees 80 3J Visual NGIGANONS 4 2cces cratered eaaaceos TAE Paada eens VENAE TERA 82 3 7 1 Locate Dwell Time arananananennanenenenennenenenenennenenenenennener 82 38 Network Time Protocol MOOG 02 cer sassd viens eaaes ced cev eneren 83 39 DISK Rebuild uns eedediwneadieeed ihe AE E Ea Ea 85 3 9 1 Full and Fractional Rebuilds 00 cece cece cece eee een e nent reenn 85 3 92 Sparing Poliey sssearsrresatsekvtedatde ektet dekke deere Meee artet dei 85 3 9 3 Manual Disk Replace Rebuild 0 0 cece cece cence eee e eee neneee 86 3 94 Manual Fail Rebuild of a Disk 0 0 0 0 cece cece cece eee teen ee eanee 86 3 10 Power Cycling the SFA10000 ccc cce cece cence eee e te eeeeeeeeeenennaees 87 310 1 Reboot Restarts ic s4 cicsarctatarrdiarisaiecessensa viarieiminty sages rates 87 3 10 2 Shut Down Power Cycle cece cece ener eee rece EENKEER NEEN 87 3 10 2 1 Power Cycling One Controller ccccc cece cece cece cece ee eenees 87 3 10 2 2 Power Cycling Both Co
38. 8 RAIDS 16 B 0 B 0 P Message from webpage 2 Are you sure you want to delete selected virtual disks cr a 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 120 Spare Pools 4 8 Spare Pools The SFA10000 supports the concept of spare pools A spare pool contains physical disks that can be used as spare disks in one or more storage pools In the event of a disk failure a disk that is assigned to a spare pool is automatically swapped into the storage pool to replace the failed disk A rebuild then occurs immediately reducing the possibility of data loss due to additional disk failures Spare pools can be shared by storage pools or dedicated to a particular storage pool in which case the spare disks will only be used by the designated storage pool NOTE Each storage pool must have a spare pool assigned to it The spare pool commands are located under the Pools pull down menu Figure 148 Figure 148 Pools Menu Pools Clear Fault Create Spare Pool i Create Storage Pool Delete Spare Pool Delete Storage Pools Locate Spare Pools Locate Storage Pools Locate Unassigned Pool Move Pool Set Spare Pool Attributes Set Spare Pool Drive Assign Policy Set Storage Pool Attributes Show Spare Pools Show Storage Pools Show Unassigned Pool Verify Pools 4 8 1 Show Spare Pools To view the list configured spare pools select Pools gt Show Spare Pools Click o
39. 8 Disk Enclosure Component Failures 5 8 1 I O Module Replacement Please refer to the respective user guides if you need detailed instructions on how to physically replace an I O module on the disk enclosure The following procedure describes how to replace reseat or swap a failing I O module 1 Identify the I O module IOM that needs to be replaced The need for an IOM replacement may have come from an event in an event log the results of a SHOW command an SNMP trap or an email message The event SNMP trap and email message include the element index within its enclosure and the enclosure WWN the outputs of SHOW ENCLOSURE and SHOW EXPANDER have the same information Use these and the SHOW ENCLOSURE command to determine the OID of the IOM s enclosure 2 Physically locate the IOM that needs to be replaced First find the ENCLOSURE and then find the EXPANDER within the enclosure If the enclosures have been labeled with their WWNs then find the enclosure whose label matches the results from Step 1 above otherwise use the LOCATE ENCLOSURE command with the enclosure OID from Step 1 Viewing from the back of the enclosure IOM 1 is on the left and IOM 2 is on the right While you might be able to issue a LOCATE EXPANDER command using the enclosure OID from Step 1 it requires that the IOM still be working well enough to light its Identify LED 3 Identify the physical controller associated with the failing IOM Follow the cable co
40. At the Create Host screen Figure 158 enter a host name and specify the Stack and OS attributes Click CREATE HOST Figure 158 Create Host Screen PRESENTATION CREATE HOST INDEX HOSTNAME STACK INDEX HOST CHARACTERISTIC HOST OS Host Name Stack 0 Select OS GENERIC WINDOWS LINUX C MAC_OS BLUEARC NASSCALER MS_CLUSTER CREATE HOST 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 126 Presentations 4 9 3 2 Map Host to Discovered Initiators 1 Select Presentation gt Import Initiators 2 At the Import Initiator screen Figure 159 select an initiator and the corresponding host s 3 Click IMPORT INITIATOR Figure 159 Import Initiator Screen DISCOVERED EE CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL ANNE CHANNEL INDEX SELECT PORT NAME NODENAME TYPE Porto Portt Port2 Port3 Port0 Portt Port2 Port3 Port0 Porti Port2 Port3 Port0 Port1 Port2 Port3 CO RPO CORPO CORPO CORPO CO RP1 CO RP1 CO RP1 CORP1 C1 RPO C1 RPO C1RPO C1 RPO CURP1 C1 RP1 CARP1 C1 RP1 18 I 0x290300060884 0x2c90300050882 IB NG v v 4 P v 19 M 0x2c90300060883 0x2c90300060882 IB d Jv P 20 I 0x2c9030007eb8b 0x2c9030007eb8a IB s p F ae s P P 21 M 0x2c9030007eb8c 0x2c9030007eb8a 1B v
41. FALSE 0x38000000 0x00000000 LOCAL Oxffff 0x00000000 REMOTE 0x38000000 0x00000000 LOCAL INACTIVE 60001 0800a3000000000008a680000 1 Creating a Virtual Disk To create a virtual disk enter the command CREATE VIRTUAL DISK CAPACITY lt capacity gt POOL lt pool id gt Figure 83 Create Virtual Disks Example Screen where lt capacity gt is the capacity of the virtual disk in GiB or type max to use all available capacity lt pool id gt is the storage pool to be used by this virtual disk Figure 83 A message is displayed to indicate whether the virtual disk creation was successful RAID 0 create virtual disk capacity 16 pool 0 VIRTUAL DISK 0 OID 0x89ba000 creation STATUS Success RAID 0 create virtual disk capacity 32 pool 0 VIRTUAL_DISK 1 OID 0x89bb001 creation STATUS Success 0x0 0x0 Naming a Virtual Dis k Figure 84 Set Virtual Disk Name Example Screen The SET VIRTUAL DISK lt id gt NAME lt name gt command lets you specify a name to identify the virtual disk Figure 84 RAID 0 set vd 0 name VD 00 VIRTUAL DISK 0 OID 0x89ba000 attributes set with STATUS Success 0x0 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 67 96 00259 001 Virtual Disk Management 3 4 4 Deleting a Virtual Disk The DELETE VIRTUAL_DISK lt id gt command deletes the specified virtual disk from the system However it does not dele
42. HOME FUTURE HOME WRITE BACK CACHE MIRRORED 0 vd 0_0 pool 0 READY RAIDS 16 AO AO SA vd 1_0 pool 0 READY RAIDS 48 AO AO wv 2 vd 2_1 pool 1 READY RAIDS 48 A1 A1 3 vd 3 2 pool 2 READY RAIDS 48 B 0 B 0 d 4 vd43 pool 3 READY RAIDS 48 Ba Bi1 z 5 vd 5_4 pool 4 READY RAID6 48 AO AO Z 6 vd 6_5 pool 5 READY RAIDS 48 AA AA 7 vd 7 6 pool 6 READY RAIDS 48 B 0 B 0 PA 8 vd 8_7 pool 7 READY RAIDS 48 B 1 Ba Fa z 9 vd 9_8 pool 8 READY RAIDS 48 A 0 AO p J 10 vd 10_9 pool 9 READY RAID1 48 AM A1 F 11 vd 11 10 pool 10 READY RAID1 48 B 0 B 0 G 12 vd 12_11 pool 11 READY RAID1 48 B 1 B 1 y A 13 vd 13_12 pool 12 READY RAID1 48 AD A0 pri pri 14 vd 14 13 pool 13 READY RAID1 48 A1 A1 Pi 15 vd 15_14 pool 14 READY RAID1 48 B 0 B 0 g 16 vd 16_15 pool 15 READY RAID1 48 B 1 B 1 Z 17 vd 17 16 pool 16 READY RAD1 48 AO AO ff ff 18 vd 18_17 pool 17 READY RAID1 48 Ad A1 f 4 l VD Name vd 0_0 VD OID 0x8c7b0000 POOL OID 0x1c790000 Useable Capacity 16 GB UUID 60001 08025a000000000008c7b0000 Current home Controller id 0x1 08029d0000 Current home RP index 0 Preferred home Controller id 0x1 08029d0000 xl 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 118 Virtual Disks Menu 4 7 2 Create a Virtual Disk To create a virtual disk select Virtual Disks gt Create Virtual Disk At the Create Virtual Disk screen Figure 145 select the storage pool s to be used T
43. Introduction 1 1 Introduction Welcome to the DataDirect Networks SFA10000 User Guide 1 1 1 DataDirect Networks Storage Fusion Architecture SFA DDN s Storage Fusion Architecture provides the foundation for balanced high performance storage system Using highly parallelized storage processing technology SFA delivers both unprecedented IOPS and massive throughput Combined with Enterprise level data protection and leading scalability density and energy efficiency SFA is the storage technology of choice for the most extreme storage infrastructure projects The SFA10000 employs RAID data integrity and data management software written from the ground up to take advantage of multi core processors and modern bus architectures Its highly threaded architecture allows performance to linearly scale with advances in underlying hardware This same architecture allows the SFA10000 to perform in the extreme range of both throughput and IOPS Designed to house the most scalable unstructured file data the system supports up to 1200 disks of raw storage while enabling a combination of SAS SATA or SSD disks 1 1 2 Product Variations Various configurations Figure 1 are available with the SFA10000 to enable full system performance capacity and the highest levels of disk enclosure fault tolerance e Five 60 bay disk enclosures with up to 300 disk modules at 28U in one rack e Ten 60 bay disk enclosures with up to 600 disk modules at 48U in two rac
44. P J P P v v P INDEX SELECT HOST HOST NAME STACK INDEX HOST CHARACTERISTIC HOST OS 0 Host_0001 o og LINUX 1 r Host 0002 0 Oxt LINUX 2 r Host 0003 o og LINUX IMPORT INITIATOR 4 9 3 3 Present Virtual Disks to Hosts 1 Select Presentation gt Create Presentation 2 At the Create Presentation screen Figure 160 select a host and the virtual disk s Figure 160 Create Presentation Screen INDEX SELECT HOST HOST NAME STACK INDEX HOST CHARACTERISTIC HOST OS C ALL HOSTS 0 c Host_0001 0 Oxt LINUX 1 a Host_0002 0 0x1 LINUX 2 c Host_0003 0 0x1 LINUX LUN SEL vp PooL CAP READ PRESENT Leave Pong Portt Port2 Port3 Bore SE rd FF PRESENT Name STATE RAD f Guy Howe Blank tr Porto Portt Port2 Port3 Porto Po ort2 Port3 Port0 Port Po ort ATIONS iT NAME r CORPO CO RPO CO RPO CO RPO co RP1 CORP1 CO RP1 CO RP1 C1 RPO C1 RPO C1 RPO C1 RPO C1RP1 C1RP1 C1 RP1 C1RP1 psi D pod REaDyRAIDS 16 oO r f FW F BR FR WB BB RB RK RK BW BW WC RF RF R BS 4 Pol RRs o r Of KR RB RK KR BW KB KR RK KR RF KR KF WP RB RF FP mo 4 fl Rosas r TT FR BR KR FR RK KR RK RK BR KR RK RK W KR RF FP Bes 4 bol peapyranse FoF TT 6 RP RK K KW KR KR WK KR RF KR KF WV RF RF FP E 4 Bot O oF f BR RK K K RK KR RF RK RK KR RK FR WW RF F is 1 Sct gRs OO r KR KR BF BP ER FR RF RB BP RF RB PB BF RF FR CREATE PRESENTATION OPTIONAL To present a virtual disk to all host ports on bo
45. Policy Device Type Rotation Speed Raw Capacity SATAssure Cache Settings ReACT IO Routing Mirroring Read Ahead Write Back Initializing Rebuilding Paused AutoWriteLock Critical Forced Write Thru Current Home Future Home Preferred Home Job OID Total Phy Disks State Member Size Free Raid5 Capacity Full Rebuild Priority Fractional Rebuild Priority 90 pID 0x0001 0x0002 0x0003 0x0004 0x0005 State NORM NORM NORM NORM NORM 0 0x19e50000 STORAGE pool 0 128KB 0x100 blocks 512 RAIDS 0 GB 0 GB 600 GB 600000000000000000000180d0000 UNASSIGNED 10 minutes ALLOW IO 50 70 80 AUTOMATIC DISABLED SATA FALSE TRUE TRUE TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE 0x38000000 0x00000000 LOCAL Oxffffffff 0x00000000 REMOTE 0x38000000 0x00000000 LOCAL 0x28000003 5 NORMAL 120 GB UUID 0x5000cca215c56e47 0x5000cca215c56456 0x5000cca215c54c71 0x5000cca215c5675c 0x5000cca215c56e55 Create Virtual Disks A virtual disk can be created to use all or a part of a storage pool To create a virtual disk use the CREATE VIRTUAL_DISK command 1 Atthe CLUI prompt type CREATE VIRTUAL_DISK POOL lt pool id gt CAPACITY lt capacity gt Configuring the SFA10000 where lt pool id gt is the storage pool to be used by this virtual disk lt capacity gt is the capacity of the virtual disk in GiB or type max to use all available capa
46. Power must be removed from the system for at least 10 seconds before it will start up again For SFA10000E the Virtual Machines are automatically shut down whenever the SHUTDOWN SUBSYSTEM command is issued 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 87 Performance Management 3 11 Performance Management Cache Coherency By default the SFA10000 runs in couplet mode where both controllers are running simultaneously communicating through internal Ethernet and InfiniBand connections This means that the SFA10000 is always running with cache coherency enabled The cache settings are configurable for each storage pool Available options are REACT Specify Real time Adaptive Cache Technology MIRRORED Specify cache data mirroring READ AHEAD CACHING Specify read ahead caching WRITE BACK CACHING Specify write back caching To display the current settings enter the command SHOW POOL lt id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES To change the settings use these commands SET POOL lt id gt REACT TRUE FALSE SET POOL lt id gt MIRRORED TRUE FALSE SET POOL lt id gt READ AHEAD CACHING TRUE FALSE SET POOL lt id gt WRITE BACK CACHING TRUE FALSE NOTE Turning off mirroring may result in data integrity issues 3 11 1 1 Cache Protection The SFA10000 UPS serves as a battery which allows the controller to flush the contents of cache to non volatile storage internal disk during a power event When
47. READY 5000c50020c61504 1 26 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO69SLO000C031ANA4 UNAS GOOD 210 READY 5000c500104ebf98 1 27 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO8HTLOQ00C032AYSB UNAS GOOD 208 READY 5000c50020cbl ac 1 28 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK08EB00000C032H8XE UNAS GOOD 224 READY 5000c50020cb0bec 1 29 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO6QY40000C0368V2V UNAS GOOD 235 READY 5000c50020c5fd24 1 30 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK0613T0000C036BKJH UNAS GOOD 144 READY 5000c50020c60d0c 1 31 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK06BGZ0000C036420K UNAS GOOD 154 READY 5000c500104 7c34 1 32 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK0621D0000C036FLVE UNAS GOOD 183 READY 5000c50020c60974 1 33 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 QWKO8APHOQO0CO35HZNU UNAS GOOD 196 READY 5000c50020cb2a70 1 34 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK08SFH0000C036FMKT UNAS GOOD 150 READY 5000c50020cb031c 1 35 SEAGATE 1T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO7QJX0000C0368UBU UNAS GOOD 231 READY 5000c50020c69d6c 1 36 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK03B3A00005018WEQS UNAS GOOD 191 READY 5000c50010334cf0 1 37 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO8RPJ0000C035D4F7 2 GOOD 131 NORM 5000c50020cafaf4 1 38 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK03Q4Z0000C03008S1 UNAS GOOD 160 READY 5000050010386b68 1 39 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK048GNO000C0358PJD UNAS GOOD 195 READY 5000c50020cb0990 1 40 SEAGATE T31000424
48. S 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG JOI TIME SET JOI TIME WAS SET BY AN ADMINISTRATOR AT 2011 10 6 4 49 20 NEARBY LOG ENTRIES MAY APPEAR OUT OF TIME ORDER OFFSET 0X1C987C7A302483D 000023 2011 10 06 04 49 20 5069068 G 3 S 1 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG LOGDISK ENABLE RECEIVED FROM STATE LOG RECEIVED FROM STATE 000024 2011 10 11 05 08 48 7027390 G 0 5 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG JOI TIME SET JOI TIME WAS SET BY AN ADMINISTRATOR AT 2011 10 11 5 8 48 NEARBY LOG ENTRIES MAY APPEAR OUT OF TIME ORDER OFFSET 0X1C987C765CD3B2B SSS SS ae 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 93 312 2 3 12 3 96 00259 001 Event Log Structure Figure 106 below illustrates the structure of an event log The severity levels include 0 Informational 1 Warning 2 Error 3 Fatal Some additional parameters are ES Enclosure WWN Slot number for example 50001ff101ed0000 60 IOC SAS SATA controller number IOCO for example WWN 5000cca216ed8430 RC Reason Code 04 Device Not Responding PHY Expander PHY device is attached too for example PHY 08 ASCQ ASC ASCQ SCSI sense data Figure 106 Event Log Structure Severity Event Time RAID Sequence Date Stamp Group Type Processor Event Number Name 014547 2011 08 31 12 30 08 1953906 G 62 S 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG ST MEMBER CHANGE The System Logs POOL MEMBER CHANGE INDEX 00000000 D 0x5000cca20def4516 PDIDI
49. S SOLE REMEDY SHALL BE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED ABOVE UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL DATADIRECT NETWORKS BE LIABLE TO THE PURCHASER OR TO ANY USER FOR ANY DAMAGES EXPENSES LOST PROFITS LOST SAVINGS DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY COSTS OF RECOVERING REPROGRAMMING OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH THE PRODUCTS OR OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE DATADIRECT NETWORKS PRODUCTS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED TO THE TERMS OF THIS EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR CONSUMER PRODUCTS AND SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide iii Important Information GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 3 29 June 2007 Copyright C 2007 Free Software Foundation Inc lt http fsf org gt Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The GNU General Public License is a free copyleft license for software and other kinds of works The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to
50. SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 144 Firmware Update 6 When the upgrade has completed verify that the download succeeded enter command SHOW PD UPDATE FIRMWARE PROGRESS For example non matching drives omitted in output for clarity RAID 0 show pd update firmware progress Encl Slot Vendor Product ID Type Revision Serial Number Pool Idx WWN Complete Status 1 5 HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS A410 JEVWMZNC5301 UNAS 271 50014ee2032d2555 Done JS GBL SUCCESS Success 1 6 HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS A410 J4V1YYAA5301 UNAS 272 50014ee2032d196c Done JS_GBL SUCCESS Success 1 17 HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS A410 FVWL5YC5301 UNAS 274 50014ee2032ca9a9 Done JS GBL SUCCESS Success 1 18 HITACHI 4HUS153014VLS300 SAS A410 JFVSUSPC5301 UNAS 269 50014ee25882b499 Done JS GBL SUCCESS Success 7 Shut down the subsystem enter command SHUTDOWN SUBSYSTEM 8 Power cycle the enclosures containing the updated physical disks 9 After powering up the disk enclosures and controller verify that the upgrade was successful enter command SHOW PD The firmware version of the updated physical disks should indicate the new version For example non matching drives omitted in output for clarity RAID 0 show pd Health Encl Slot Vendor Product ID Type Cap GB RPM Revision Serial Number Pool State Idx Stati 1 5 HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS 1863 5 4K A410 JEVWMZNC5301 UNAS GOOD 279 READ 1 6 HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS 1863 5
51. Set Network Interface Example RAID 0 ui set network interface local 0 ip address 192 168 0 10 ip mask 255 255 255 0 ip gateway 192 168 0 1 NETWORK INTERFACE 0 set with STATUS Success 0x0 O ee ee en ee eee nen eee ee nee eee EEE EEE EEE EEE 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 39 Configuring the SFA10000 2 To verify the new settings enter the command Figure 47 UI SHOW NETWORK INTERFACE LOCAL Figure 47 Show Network Interface Settings RAID 0 ui show network interface local Network device id 0 address 192 168 0 10 netmask 255 255 255 0 gateway 192 168 0 1 3 Switch the serial cable to the RS 232 port on second controller and repeat the above steps to enter a different IP address for second controller At this point you should be able to use the SFA OS CLUI and GUI via the network If you want to set up email and SNMP event notification refer to Section 3 13 5 Email and SNMP Notification Setup on page 97 for information 2 7 8 Access Virtual Machines SFA10000E Only The SFA10000E is shipped with Virtual Machines VM preconfigured and installed for serving your EXAScaler or GRIDScaler file system NOTE By default each EXAScaler system is shipped with three VMs enabled and a GRIDScaler system is shipped with four VMs enabled The Virtual Machines can be accessed in one of two ways e VNC You can use a VNC viewer to connect to a VM cons
52. Single Phase gt Plug Receptacle m Figure 21 PDU Output Connector Types IEC 60320 C13 IEC 60320 C19 aka IEC 320 C3 aka IEC 320 C19 These PDUs can either be connected to two separate AC power sources for example utility power and UPS power or to a single AC power source Even though half the PDUs will provide sufficient power to operate the system all PDUs must be connected to take advantage of redundant DC power supplies Each SFA10000 controller has a UPS that is used to protect its cached data in the event of a power failure These must be configured with firmware and switch settings depending on the AC voltage and how the site power is grounded This configuration is best done at the DDN factory and so it is helpful to provide these measurements to DDN as part of the order To Do List 7 Measure and note down the three voltages X Y X G and Y G as shown in Figure 22 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 18 Site Preparation Figure 22 X Y X G and Y G Voltages Each UPS unit has two DIP switches on the back During installation verify that the switches are correctly set as described in Section 2 5 7 O After power on verify that the UPS firmware versions match the above measured voltage as described in Section 2 7 3 If these are not correct then have a DDN Field Engineer correct them If either voltage X G or voltage Y G is less th
53. These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or propagating a covered work you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so 10 Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients Each time you convey a covered work the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors to run modify and propagate that work subject to this License You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License An entity transaction is a transaction transferring control of an organization or substantially all assets of one or subdividing an organization or merging organizations If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party s predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License For example you may not impose a license fee royalty or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License and you may not initiate litigation including a cross claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making us
54. VDs are presented to a Windows host and the subsystem assigns the SCSI LUN_ID RAID 1 application create presentation vd 51 host 305 PRESENTATION 2482 OID 0x256e09b2 creation STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 1 application create presentation vd 52 host 305 PRESENTATION 2483 OID 0x256 09b3 creation STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 1 application show presentation Channel Mask Controller 0 Controller 1 Pres Host Host VD Home Read RP O RP 1 RPO RP1 Index Name Index Index LUN Only Only 0123 0123 0123 0123 02480 co lsl 00304 00049 060 OFF R W ffff ffff ffff ffff 02481 co lsl 00304 00050 061 OFF R W ffff ffff ffff ffff 02482 co test d10 00305 00051 000 OFF R W ffff ffff ffff ffff 02483 co test d10 00305 00052 001 OFF R W ffff ffff ffff ffff Total Presentations 4 NOTE For Windows environments you should let the subsystem specify the LUN ID for a virtual disk RAID 1 application create presentation vd 58 host 306 lun 10 PRESENTATION 2484 OID 0x257009b4 creation STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 1 application create presentation vd 59 host 306 lun 12 PRESENTATION 2485 OID 0x257109b5 creation STATUS Success 0x0 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 80 Presentations RAID 1 app show pres Channel Mask Controller 0 Controller 1 Pres Host Host VD Home Read Index Name Index
55. all For example if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program 13 Use with the GNU Affero General Public License Notwithstanding any other provision of this License you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work and to convey the resulting work The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License section 13 concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such 14 Revised Versions of this License The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License or any later version applies to it you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not sp
56. and Y G are greater than 10 volts then the UPS firmware version should be Cont 01 20 Inve 83 74 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 37 Configuring the SFA10000 Figure 42 Show UPS Attributes KKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK UPS s KKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK Sub Index Sub OID 0x80000001 Enclosure Index 0 Enclosure OID 0x50000000 Position SES Status OK Charge Level 96 5 f 4 Charge Level Hold Up Time Remaining 17 minutes Enabled TRUE AC Failed FALSE Present TRUE Interface Failed FALSE UPS Failed FALSE Battery Health OK Fault Indicator OFF Predicted Failure Ind OFF Locate Indicator OFF Battery Mfg Date Fri Nov 19 21 44 38 2010 Battery Life Remaining 648 days Part number PW5115 RM 1500VA Serial number GD371A0853 Firmware version Cont 01 20 Inve 01 02 gj Firmware Version 2 7 4 Clear System Configuration not applicable to SFA10000E Ay Use of the CLEAR SUBSYSTEM CONFIGURATION command will destroy any existing data Warning y 9 NOTE For SFA10000E the storage has been preconfigured so the existing configuration should NOT be cleared Skip this step and proceed to Section 2 7 5 Set the System Name To ensure that you are starting from a fresh clean install enter CLEAR SUBSYSTEM CONFIGURATION Then enter YES twice to confirm deletion of current configuration Figure 43 Figure 43 Clear Subsystem Configurat
57. are specific to Firmware Version 1 4 2 To access the most up to date commands use the CLUI s Online Help feature 3 1 1 Management Interface SAN management information for the SFA10000 can be accessed locally through a serial interface or remotely through SSH Locally via Serial Interface Any RS 232 terminal or terminal emulator such as Hyperterminal can be used to configure and monitor the SFA10000 1 Connect the supplied serial cable to the RS 232 port on the controller Figure 69 Connect the other end of the cable to a serial port on a standard PC Figure 69 RS 232 Port on Controller Controller RS 232 2 Load a serial console program such as HyperTerminal minicom and screen and use the following settings for the serial connection Bits per second 115 200 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control None 3 Once connected press the lt Enter gt key to bring up the login prompt Enter the user name user and password user Remotely via SSH To configure and monitor the SFA10000 remotely connect the system to your Ethernet network Please refer to Section 3 13 Remote Management of SFA10000 for further information on how to set up the controller s network interface 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 53 Accessing the SFA1
58. bay Cam the disk module home The camming foot on the base of the module will engage into the slot in the enclosure 5 When the module is fully inserted close the handle You should hear a click as the latch engages and holds the handle closed 6 After you have installed all the disk modules in this enclosure close the enclosure covers and engage both cover latches 7 Squeeze the tabs on both rack slides and push the enclosure back into the rack 96 00259 001 Rev E DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 175 Disk Module Installation C2 SS7000 Disk Module Installation Procedure NOTE The SS7000 design allows for disk bays to be left empty without the need for fitting dummy disk modules 1 Squeeze the release tabs together on the front panel Figure 189 and carefully pull it forward out of the rack Keep pulling until the enclosure locks and you hear a clicking sound Figure 189 Release Tabs on Front Panel Release Tabs 2 Open the covers Figure 190 Loosen the two Phillips screws on the covers Press the release buttons on the top cover release handles Pull up the release handles Figure 190 Open Top Covers Release Buttons Screws Release Handles 3 On the disk module press the release catch to release the handle Figure 191 Carefully slide the module into a disk slot until it contacts the baseboard and begins to engage the handle Press down on the handle until it
59. cables can be properly routed and connected The airflow through the racks is from front to back The front of one rack should not be near the back of another rack NOTE Racks with more than 5 disk enclosures have an anti tip plate installed at the floor level and it is important that it does not cover a cold air grill Access to the equipment in the racks is required from both the front and the rear of racks Front access is for physical disk disk enclosure controller chassis and UPS maintenance Rear access is for power supply and I O module maintenance plus cabling The recommended service clearances are 48 1220 mm from the front of a rack and 30 762 mm between the back of an enclosure and a wall or 30 762 mm between the back of a SFA10000 system and the back of another enclosure that is exhausting hot air Figure 18 No service clearance is required on the side of the rack Figure 18 Service Area and Dimensions View from Top of Rack Rack 28 00 x 45 75 712mm x 1162mm Front Fully Extended Rear Service Service Area Disk Enclosure Area a 48 00 1220mm 30 00 762mm To Do List 7 Plan the location of the racks so that they have sufficient access and proper airflow A scale drawing is recommended 7 Also refer to the DDN 42U 45U 28 Wide Rack Installation and Service Guide for more information on positioning the rack and cable management The best way to accomplish this is to create rows o
60. cache has been completely flushed the controller will shut itself down When power is restored the flushed cache is replayed back from the non volatile storage and committed to disk Mirrored Write Back Cache MWBC provides a mechanism of cache protection by copying or mirroring the contents of cache from one singlet to the peer singlet and vice versa In the event of a singlet failure the copy of cache sitting in the surviving peer can be committed to disk by the surviving peer Although there is a latency involved in the cache mirroring process it is recommended as additional protection of data 3 11 2 Single Controller Write Back Cache Policy The SFA10000 can be set to automatically switch to write thru mode upon loss of one of the controllers in the couplet configuration Loss of a controller is defined as a controller shutting down for any reason such as crash normal shut down and hardware failure To change the settings enter the command SET SUBSYSTEM SINGLE CONTROLLER WB DISABLE ENABLE The default setting is DISABLE which allows automatic switching to write thru mode upon the loss of one controller 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 88 3A13 96 00259 001 Performance Management Right Side I O Access to virtual disks uses the notion of a preferred home or homed path If a path to the VD utilizes the peer controller additional latency is incurred for every I O as
61. character Delete Del or Esc 3 deletes current character Up Arrow Esc A retrieves previous command in the history buffer Down Arrow Esc B retrieves next command in the history buffer Right Arrow Esc C moves cursor to the right by one character Left Arrow Esc D moves cursor to the left by one character Home Esc H or Esc 1 get the oldest command in the history buffer End Esc K or Esc 4 get the latest command in the history buffer Insert Esc 2 toggles between insert mode and overtype mode PgUp Esc 5 retrieves oldest command in the history buffer PgDn Esc 6 retrieves latest command in the history buffer Ctrl U Ctrl U delete to beginning of line Ctrl K Ctrl K delete to end of line Ctrl A Ctrl A move cursor to beginning of line Ctrl E Ctrl E move cursor to end of line EEE EEE 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 55 Physical Disk Information 3 2 Physical Disk Information The disks in the system are categorized into one of the following pools e Unassigned Pool By default all the disks or replacement disks are initially allocated to this pool When a disk has failed or been released from a spare pool for example it is also moved to this pool e Storage Pool sometimes referred to as a RAID group A collection of 2 to 10 disks ideally of the same capacity and type e Spare Pool This type of pool contains physical disks that can be used as spare disks in one or more st
62. controller 5 4 3 4 Disk Shelf Upgrade Once the file is copied from either procedure above Linux or Windows follow the steps below to complete the upgrade 1 Login to the primary controller User name is user Password is user 2 Shut down the secondary controller by entering the command SHUTDOWN CONTROLLER REMOTE 3 Set subsystem offline by entering the command SET SUBSYSTEM OFFLINE 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 140 Firmware Update 4 Determine the enclosure IDs enter the command SHOW ENCLOSURE This will display the list of enclosures in the system 5 Issue the firmware update command for each of the disk enclosures UPDATE ENCLOSURE lt enclosure id gt FILE lt file name uploaded gt The upgrade will take approximately 1 hour for each enclosure 6 To monitor the update progress enter the command SHOW ENCLOSURE lt id gt UPDATE FIRMWARE PROGRESS For example RAID 0 show enclosure 1 update firmware progress ES download progress for enclosure 1 CDF file name tmp janus_update SFA_D02_011 DDN CDF is for Vendor ID DDN CDF is for Product ID SFA OS CDF package version DO2 011 CDF release date 01 Mar 2011 Download is in progress and 15 percent complete Download consists of 2 images Image 2 is in progress and 13 percent complete NOTE An alternate command to monitor the upgrade progress SHOW ENCLOSURE lt id gt UPDATE FIRMWARE PROGRESS The
63. covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5 provided that you also convey the machine readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License in one of these ways a Convey the object code in or embodied in a physical product including a physical distribution medium accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange b Convey the object code in or embodied in a physical product including a physical distribution medium accompanied by a written offer valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model to give anyone who possesses the object code either 1 a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source or 2 access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge c Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially and only if you received the object code with such an offer in accord with subsection 6b d Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place gratis or for a charge and offer
64. enclosure 52460 Disk Enclosure FRU FRU Part Number EE Description Enclosure FRU 2460 RLK 1 Adjustable rail kit FRU 2460 PSU 2 Power supply module FRU 2460 IOM 2 I O module KIT CBL10KSS Mini SAS cable kit to connect an SFA10000 singlet or a SFA10000E couplet to 5 x 60 bay enclosures Also used to connect SFA10000 couplet to 5 x 24 bay enclosures includes 2 x 2 meter cables and 18 x 3 meter cables FRU 2460 ENC Empty chassis FRU 2460 BNK 2 5 dummy disk module 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 174 C Disk Module Installation This appendix provides detailed instructions on how to install a disk module in the SS6000 SS7000 and SS2460 enclosures C 1 S56000 Disk Module Installation Procedure NOTE TheSS6000 design allows for disk bays to be left empty without the need for fitting dummy disk modules 1 Squeeze the release tabs together on the front panel and carefully pull the enclosure forward out of the rack Keep pulling until the enclosure locks and you hear a clicking sound 2 Disengage both enclosure cover latches Figure 187 and open the covers Figure 187 SS6000 Enclosure Cover Latch DJ Latch DisengagedP gt I 3 Onthe disk module slide the latch backward to release the handle Figure 188 Figure 188 Release Disk Module Handle 1 Slide Latch Backward 2 Lift Handle 4 Insert the module into a disk
65. ensures proper air flow for the enclosure so do not remove it until a new module is available for replacement Figure 7 Controller Fan Module 1 2 3 Power Supply Module Each controller includes two power supply modules Figure 8 These modules are redundant and hot swappable If one module fails the other module will maintain sufficient power to the enclosure The presence of a faulty power supply module ensures proper air flow for the enclosure so do not remove it until a new module is available for replacement The LED mounted on the module indicates the status of the power supply It is green when the module is operating normally and turns off when a fault occurs Figure 8 Controller Power Supply Module Thumbscrew Status LED i 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 8 The SFA10000 System Hardware 1 2 4 Internal Disk Modules The SFA10000 controller includes three internal hard disks Disk A is the system disk that contains the Linux OS the SFA OS firmware the event log and controller specific configuration not storage configuration Disks B and C will be used in an upcoming release Each disk module comprises a single low profile 1 0 inch high 3 5 inch form factor hard disk mounted in a carrier The module handle provides camming of the module into and out of disk bays and positive spring loading of the disk baseplane connector Figure 9 The han
66. equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code If the place to copy the object code is a network server the Corresponding Source may be on a different server operated by you or a third party that supports equivalent copying facilities provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements e Convey the object code using peer to peer transmission provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d A separable portion of the object code whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library need not be included in conveying the object code work A User Product is either 1 a consumer product which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal family or household purposes or 2 anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling In determining whether a product is a consumer product doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage For a particular product received by a particular user normally used
67. identify the WWN and the discovered initiator index number with the host and its index number and import the appropriate discovered initiator to an association with the appropriate host Example of importing discovered initiators RAID 1 application import discovered 11 host 304 INITIATOR 12 OID 0x2d66000c imported from DISCOVERED INITIATOR 11 OID 0x3000000b STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 1 application import discovered 12 host 304 INITIATOR 13 OID 0x2d67000d imported from DISCOVERED INITIATOR 12 OID 0x3000000c STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 1 application import discovered 4 host 306 INITIATOR 14 OID 0x2d68000e imported from DISCOVERED INITIATOR 4 OID 0x30000004 STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 1 application import discovered 8 host 306 INITIATOR 15 OID 0x2d69000f imported from DISCOVERED INITIATOR 8 OID 0x30000008 STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 1 app import discovered 6 host 305 INITIATOR 16 OID 0x2d6a0010 imported from DISCOVERED INITIATOR 6 OID 0x30000006 STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 1 app imp disc 7 host 305 INITIATOR 17 OID 0x2d6b0011 imported from DISCOVERED INITIATOR 7 OID 0x30000007 STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 1 application show initiator 96 00259 001 Host Initiator Identifier Index Type Index node name port name 00012 FC 00304 0x2000001b32827e95 0x2100001b32827e95 00013 FC 00304 0x2001001b32a27e95 0x2101001b32a27e95 00014 FC 0030
68. is to guard against the controller firmware from executing operations that may not necessarily be the desired operation of the user These conditions will most likely be seen in a new system installation environment For example when a system is booted and the backend physical disks have never been installed behind the controllers the controller firmware has never had a chance to write out configuration metadata The controller recognizes that there is no valid metadata and requires the user to acknowledge proceeding or not Use the SHOW CONTROLLER LOCAL ALL ATTRIBUTES command to display the MIR condition of the controller you are logged into Figure 165 Figure 165 Show Controller Information Screen RAID 0 show controller 0 all Index 0 OID 0x38000000 Firmware Version Release 1 4 2 Source Version 8540 DDN Fully Checked In Yes Private Build No Build Type Production Build Date and Time 2011 10 88 22 10UTC Builder Username root Builder Hostname co bs2 Build for CPU Type AMD 64 bit Hardware Version 0000 State RUNNING Name A Controller LOCAL SECONDARY Controller ID 0x0001 0800a30000 Enclosure OID 0x50000006 Index 6 Universal LAN Address 0x00000001ff0800a3 MIR Reason None Listed below are some commonly seen MIR conditions and their required actions Refer to the DDN SFA OS Service Manual for a complete list of MIR conditions MIR_JIS_DISCOVERY_IN_PROG Initialized Storage discove
69. mis 8 FAN 1 FAN 2 KSE FAN 3 KS 72FENSSUN O ZarH nNSRSUI Zoey l AI SZCIOWS ZA DEZ 3 ALBA Bi FEO aar A Gear F HIONZONSGE KJNZJISGGEN g i KON i no Seog HSCCOoOLSS WOODEN HSENOIJDNG HSC One SONG a K En zy TAZA N Ly GA ReESEON ID Nessa es Rese Sony oe saa IG DE an ha Dea Hs IG Q O BEREO O Issa am a al Fan Modules wt Control Buttons LEDs 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 5 The SFA10000 System Hardware At the back there are two power supply modules and various I O connectors Figure 4 and Figure 5 illustrate the rear views of the SFA10000 and SFA10000E controllers respectively Figure 4 SFA10000 Controller Rear View Host Ports Client Channels Power Supply Module 1 IB Inter Controller Link IB Inter Controller Link
70. more Physical Disks and Disk Enclosures Disk I O A physical interface SAS that has a unique PCI bus number and is utilized for one or more Controller Disk Channels A Disk I O Controller is managed by the RAID Stack running on a single RAID Processor GiB gibibyte A unit of digital information storage and denote 1 073 741 824 bytes 230 bytes Host A persistent logical object that represents an abstract client for one or more Virtual Disk s and that is given access to data on those Virtual Disk s ICL Inter Controller Link Initiator A persistent logical object associated with a Host that represents a FCP or SRP initiator port on a Host s HBA KiB kibibyte A unit of digital information storage and denote 1 024 bytes 2 bytes MiB mebibyte A unit of digital information storage and denote 1 024 kibibytes 220 bytes 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 194 Physical Disk PD Pool Presentation RAIDset RP Singlet Spare Pool Storage Pool Unassigned Pool Virtual Disk VD 96 00259 001 Terminology A disk module SAS or SATA or solid state device SSD used by the system back end to store data and subsystem metadata A set of physical disks There are three types Storage Pool Spare Pool and Unassigned Pool A persistent logical object that describes an association between a Host and a Virtual Disk that specifies if a Host may access the Virtual D
71. on a SFA10000 has the following components e Discovered Initiators A Discovered Initiator is defined as a Fibre Channel or InfiniBand initiator that has logged into the SFA10000 This is normally a single port on a Fibre Channel or InfiniBand HCA in an external computer e Host A Host is an abstract client of a virtual disk that has access to all data within the virtual disk This most commonly represents an external computer with one or more Fibre Channel or InfiniBand initiators Host attributes are OS operating system of which you can select GENERIC CUSTOM DEFAULT WINDOWS LINUX MAC OS BLUEARC NASSCALER or MS CLUSTER The OS attribute dictates the way the controller responds to certain Fibre Channel commands where appropriate For example Mac OS X expects a different response from an inquiry of LUNO the controller LUN than a Windows host Initiator An initiator is a persistent logical object associated with a host that represents a FCP or SRP initiator port on a host s HBA e Channel A Channel is one of the Fibre Channel or InfiniBand ports on the controller Channel attributes are MODE of which you can select STANDARD SGI MAC_OS or BLUEARC When MAC_OS is selected the port s node name will be set differently in order to be visible to a Macintosh system e Stack The Application Stack is a layer of the SFA OS that provides services external to the SFA appliance through the use of virtual disks Stack settings apply glob
72. refers to a typical or common use of that class of product regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses or expects or is expected to use the product A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial industrial or non consumer uses unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide vi Important Information Installation Information for a User Product means any methods procedures authorization keys or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made If you convey an object code work under this section in or with or specifically for use in a User Product and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term regardless of how the transaction is characterized the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party r
73. share and change the works By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program to make sure it remains free software for all its users We the Free Software Foundation use the GNU General Public License for most of our software it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for them if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights Therefore you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it responsibilities to respect the freedom of others For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps 1 assert copyright o
74. simultaneous power failure and controller hardware failure occurs the surviving controller can recover the transactions Storage Metadata Mirrored n Ways SFA OS stores a copy of storage system metadata on 18 physical disks to minimize the likelihood that its metadata is lost or corrupted Partial Rebuild This feature reduces rebuild times by updating only the data that has changed while the disk was down The SFA OS tracks the changes made to a RAID set when a member physical disk becomes unavailable If that member becomes available again within a user definable timeout only the stripes that were modified while the member was missing are rebuilt This minimizes the mean time to repair for the RAID set and thus limits any performance impact of a disk repair e Hot Swappable and Redundant Components Adhering to enterprise RAS standards most hardware components such as physical disks power supply modules and fan module are redundant and hot swappable Hot Spares The SFA OS provides pools of spare physical disks that can be automatically used to replace failed physical disks By replacing a failed RAID set member automatically the mean time to repair for the RAID set is minimized resulting in improved data reliability e Management Options via RS 232 and Ethernet SSH A RS 232 port and Ethernet ports are included to provide local and remote management capabilities 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guid
75. temperature sensor located in the power supply has been inserted LOG_ES_TEMPERATURE_SENSOR_NORMAL A temperature sensor located in the power supply has returned to normal status LOG_ES_TEMPERATURE_SENSOR_REMOVED A temperature sensor located in the power supply has been removed LOG_ES_TEMPERATURE_SENSOR_WARNING A temperature sensor in the enclosure has reported a warning condition LOG_ES_UPS_CLIENT_IS_RESPONSIVE Controller enclosure UPS is responsive LOG RAID UNCORRECTED MEDIUM ERR Aphysical device medium error could not be corrected due to lack of pool redundancy LOG RAID UNCORRECTED SILENT ERR A SATAssure error silent error could not be corrected due to lack of pool redundancy DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 99 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 100 96 00259 001 Table 5 SNMP Only Events Remote Management of SFA10000 SNMP ONLY Events Error Description LOG_RT_SNMP_TRAP_EVENT Event received LOG ST MEMBER CHANGE A member of a storage pool has changed its status Table 6 SNMP and Email Notification Events SNMP and Email Notification Events Error Description LOG_AMPD_MPI_IOC_INIT_FAIL SAS SATA channel has failed to initialize LOG ES COOLING ELEMENT ERROR Enclosure cooling element has reported an error condition LOG ES CTLR PWR S
76. temperature sensors RAID 1 show temp kr skr sr as sr aar skr sr sr sr ar ar aar ra ar ra Temperature Sensor s rs skr skr aa skr aa skr sr skr sr skr or ar skr aar kr sr Over Temp Indicators Idx Enc1 Pos Temp C Present Warning Failure Failure Locate Location SES Status 1 I gt 36 TRUE FALSE FALSE OFF OFF PSU1 OK 2 1 2 36 TRUE FALSE FALSE OFF OFF PSU2 OK Sensors 3 i 3 30 TRUE FALSE FALSE OFF OFF BB F RHT OK inside 4 1 4 29 TRUE FALSE FALSE OFF OFF BB F LFT OK 5 1 5 34 TRUE FALSE FALSE OFF OFF BB R RAT OK 556000 6 1 6 33 TRUE FALSE FALSE OFF OFF BB R LET OK 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 191 Temperature Sensor Locations G 3 SS7000 Disk Enclosure The SS7000 enclosure contains 6 temperature sensors located throughout the enclosure One temperature sensor is located at the inlet of each power cooling module There are two temperature sensors on the front of the baseboard measuring true ambient inlet air temperature to the enclosure Each ambient temperature sensor is connected to an independent IC bus for redundancy There is one temperature sensor on each I O module measuring the inlet air temperature to the I O module Figure 216 shows the position of these temperature sensors within the SS7000 Figure 216 Temperature Sensor Positions within SS7000 2 Power Cooling Module 2 I O Module EE Baseboard The SHOW TEMP command will dis
77. tent reenn 50 Chapter 3 Administration 31 Accessing the SFAIOO0D orsina a Seren sleneabaen Guess 53 3 1 1 Management Interface aranenunnananenennnnanenenenennanenenenenene 53 3 1 2 User Logins rand akdisdresser vn yaaa new keen ped adesenenied 54 3 1 3 Available Commands asananenvnnanenenenennanenenenennnnenerenenene 54 3 1 3 1 Basic Key Operations 0c c eee eee eee NEEE A 55 32 Physical Disk Informations sa 0 csciesscdde lice tieiadaaceetbvesansanedee saad 56 3 2 1 Disk Information ccc cece cece nee nen enn teen e nen en eneneeens 56 322 DISK Stat S crsiinweichdsadd iaoe E EE ETO E E a E a a Aei 58 3 3 Storage Pool Management 0 0 0 vveecesee seed eta cnsaedered svaneealeteevabiants 59 3 3 1 Display Storage Pool Information cece cece cece cent eee ee enees 59 3 3 2 Creating a Storage Pool eee eee eee r ENEE n tent e een enes 61 3 3 3 SATASSUIC urne eee Eee dae ar ee 62 3 3 4 Background Verify Scan 0 1 0 cece eee en een ene n tent en enn enes 63 3 3 5 Storage Pool Initialization ccc cece cece nee n eee een enn 64 3 3 5 1 Initialization Job Failure 6 ccc ccc ccc cece cece eee e ee eeeeeeees 64 3 3 6 Naming a Storage Pool cece e eee cee nee ene nen tent e ean enes 65 3 3 7 Deleting a Storage Pool cece e cee eee eee e nee e tent eneenenes 65 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide xvii 96 00259 001
78. the enclosure types you have To do this issue the CLUI command SHOW ENCLOSURE This will display the enclosure information in a table format ROK OK kkk kkk kkk kkk k ji Enclosure s 7 KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KH Idx Type Logical ID Vendor ID Product ID Revision FW Version 0 CONTROLLER 0x0001 0801c90000 DDN SFA10000 0000 1 4 2 1 DISK 0x50001 210030000 DDN SS7000 0402 04 02 01 2 DISK 0x50001 210006000 DDN SS7000 0402 04 02 01 3 DISK 0x50001 21000a000 DDN SS7000 0402 04 02 01 4 DISK 0x50001 210008000 DDN SS7000 0402 04 02 01 5 DISK 0x50001 21002a000 DDN SS7000 0402 04 02 01 6 CONTROLLER 0x0001 0802810000 DDN SFA10000 0000 1 4 2 Total Enclosures 7 The naming convention of the files match up accordingly e SS6000 SS6000_ lt FW Version gt DDN e S7000 SS7000_ lt FW Version gt DDN e 552460 SS2460_ lt FW Version gt DDN Before starting this procedure verify that all system disruptions including a power cycling of the system will not be executed on the Warning system for the next 2 hours There are two 2 parts to update the enclosure firmware 1 Upload the enclosure firmware to the primary controller using either Linux Environment or Windows Use the CLUI command SHOW CONTROLLER to identify the primary controller The example below shows the user is currently logged into the primary controller 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 139 Firmwar
79. the time to return the storage pool to full redundancy and can be controlled by adjustable time limit for each storage pool Permitted time limits are 0 in which case fractional rebuild is off to 240 minutes The timer will begin when a disk in the storage pool is declared missing If the disk reappears prior to the expiration of the timer a fractional rebuild will be done Otherwise the disk will be declared failed replaced by a spare and a full rebuild will begin to return the storage pool to full redundancy The default fractional rebuild timer Disk Timeout setting is 10 minutes Under heavy write workloads it is possible that the number of stripes that need to be rebuilt will exceed the system s internal limits prior to the timer expiration When this happens a full rebuild will be started automatically instead of waiting for the fractional rebuild timeout Use the SHOW POOL lt id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES command to display the current Disk Timeout setting Figure 92 Figure 92 Show Pool All Attributes RAID 0 show pool 0 all Index 0 OID 0x1a520000 Type STORAGE Name pool 0 Chunk Size 128KB 0x100 blocks Block Size 512 RAID Type RAID6 Free Raid6 Capacity 0 GB Max VD Size 0 GB Total Capacity 720 GB UUID 60001 0800a3000000000001a520000 Global Spare Pool Oxlaca000e Index 14 DiskTimeout FRT TO minute To change the disk timeout setting use this command SET POOL lt id gt DISK
80. third paragraph of section 11 However if you cease all violation of this License then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated a provisionally unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license and b permanently if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation Moreover your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License for any work from that copyright holder and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10 9 Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer to peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance However nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work
81. through a computer network with no transfer of a copy is not conveying An interactive user interface displays Appropriate Legal Notices to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that 1 displays an appropriate copyright notice and 2 tells the user that there is no warranty for the work except to the extent that warranties are provided that licensees may convey the work under this License and how to view a copy of this License If the interface presents a list of user commands or options such as a menu a prominent item in the list meets this criterion 1 Source Code The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it Object code means any non source form of a work A Standard Interface means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body or in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language one that is widely used among developers working in that language The System Libraries of an executable work include anything other than the work as a whole that a is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component but which is not part of that Major Component and b serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form A Major Component in this context me
82. to the controller b Disconnect the cables from the controller c Remove the front bezel d Remove the 4 screws that secure the controller to the rack e Slide the controller out from the rack to the point that the slide rails click on each side and lock into place f With one person on each side of the controller press the slide rail release tabs as shown in Figure 186 forward in the direction of the arrow This will enable the release of the controller side rails from the rack rails Figure 186 Rack Rail Release Tab 2 oS g Slide the controller forward until the controller side rails are disengaged from the rack rails Place the controller on a sturdy table h Remove the side rails from the old unit and install them on the new controller i Slide the controller side rails into the rack rails by carefully aligning them and sliding the controller inward towards the rack until they click into the locked position j Reinstall the 4 screws that secure the controller to the rack k Reinstall the front bezel 1 Reconnect the cables at the back 8 Configure the IP address of the replacement controller By default the FRU replacement controllers are configured with IP address 10 0 0 1 unless noted otherwise Login to the controller via its serial port and configure the network interface settings Refer to Section 3 13 3 Change Network Interface Settings if you need instructions on how to change the settings
83. two screws on each side near the rear of chassis Figure 205 Figure 205 Secure Inner Rails 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 185 Rack Installation Procedure 9 Then push the chassis into slides to complete rack installation Figure 206 CAUTION The main purpose of the chassis handles is for rackmount use only The controller is NOT to be carried or transported by the handles Figure 206 Install Chassis to Rack 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 186 Rack Installation Procedure F 2 Rackmounting the UPS Unit The UPS unit is designed to fit within an 1U rack space Follow these steps to mount the UPS in your rack 1 The rackmount kit for the UPS includes two mounting brackets with 8 screws and two rack rails with 8 screws Figure 207 shows a rackmount rail Figure 207 UPS Rackmount Rail Butterfly Screws 2 Attach the two mounting brackets to the two sides of the UPS using 8 flat head screws Figure 208 Use the bracket marked LEFT for the left side when viewing from front of unit and the RIGHT bracket for the right side Figure 208 Mounting Bracket on UPS Use 4 Screws to Attach One Mounting Bracket 3 Loosen the two butterfly screws on each rack rail Figure 207 Adjust the length of the rails to fit the depth of your rack Then tighten the butterfly screws 4 Use one screw at the bottom to secure th
84. 0 103 0 0 0 0 0 7005 116304 68 0 0 104 0 0 0 0 0 5158 186392 148 0 0 105 0 0 0 0 0 2825 102083 148 0 0 106 0 0 0 0 0 3481 210768 248 0 0 107 0 0 0 0 0 3641 220500 248 0 0 108 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 109 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 110 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 111 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 112 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 113 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 114 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 115 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 116 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 117 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 118 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 119 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 89 Performance Management 3 11 4 Background Job Priority Initialization and rebuild operations are background processes and their rates can be adjusted to minimize their impact on system performance To display the list of current jobs enter command SHOW JOB The type of job and percentage of completion are displayed Figure 96 Figure 96 Show Job Example Screen 1 TR KK RR KR RR KKK im Background Jobs ke sr kr kr kr ke KK Fraction NE Idx Type Target Sub State Complete Priority Status Time 0 FULL REBUILD POOL 0 PD 135 RUNNING 53 80 NA 1 VERIFY ONCE POOL 1 NA RUNNING 30 99 NA 2 INITIALIZE POOL 2 NA RUNNING 20 99 NA Total Background Jobs 3 To display the details of a job Figure 97 enter command SHOW JOB lt job idx gt ALL ATTRIBUTES Figure 97 Show Job Example Screen 2 KKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKK KKK RK Background Jobs KREKKKKKKKK
85. 0 7 35 TRUE FALSE FALSE OFF OF 8 0 8 58 TRUE FALSE FALSE OFF OFF 9 0 9 42 TRUE FALSE FALSE OFF OFF Inlet T1 Sensor Inlet T2 Sensor Figure 212 Figure 213 and Figure 214 show the locations of the 9 temperature sensors inside each controller Figure 212 Temperature Sensor Locations within Controller Oo 3 e h A g D v a a Inlet T2 on riser 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 189 Temperature Sensor Locations Figure 213 Temperature Sensor Locations on Base Board SISSEYD JO JULY 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 190 Temperature Sensor Locations G 2 S56000 Disk Enclosure The SS6000 enclosure contains 6 temperature sensors located throughout the enclosure One temperature sensor is located at the inlet of each power cooling module There are 4 temperature sensors distributed on the baseboard The front two temperature sensors are used for fan control these internal sensors are typically 5 to 7 degrees above inlet ambient temperature Figure 215 shows the position of these temperature sensors within the SS6000 Figure 215 Temperature Sensor Positions within SS6000 BB R LFT y PSU 1 ii itd BB F RHT BB F LFT The SHOW TEMP command will display the status information of the
86. 00 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 24 Cable Connections Figure 26 Connecting SFA10000 Controllers to 10 x SS6000 Enclosures or 10 x SS7000 Enclosures Controller 0 Controller 1 Disk Enclosure 1 1 O Module A I O Module B IE IE Disk Enclosure 2 1 O Module A I O Module B 001 021 121 Disk Enclo 003 Disk Enclo 010 Disk Enclo 012 Disk Enclo 013 Disk Enclo 040 Disk E E 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 25 Cable Connections Figure 27 Connecting 20 x 60 Bay Enclosures to SFA10000 Controllers Controller 0 Controller 1
87. 0000 al User Logins RS 232 Login For a terminal session press the lt Enter gt key to bring up the login prompt Enter the user name user and password user Login via SSH For a SSH session Figure 70 enter the user name user and password user Both are case sensitive Figure 70 SSH Login Screen login as user user 10 23 23 16 s password Linux none 2 6 25 ddn 016620 3 2 SMP Tue Oct 18 10 38 29 MST 2011 x DataDirect Networks SFA Logout To logout enter the command QUIT For SSH connection the current session will be disconnected 3 1 2 Available Commands The SFA OS CLUI commands are independent of case Most of the keywords can be abbreviated and most of the punctuations are optional Entering the character at the CLUI prompt will display the available commands within the CLUI Figure 71 To get help information on a command type the command followed by a question mark For example ASSIGN lt Enter gt will display help on assign options on the system Figure 71 Help Screen RAID O Select one of the following subjects for additional commands APPLICATION Selects the application processor as the subject RAID Selects the raid processor as the subject UI Selects the user interface as the subject Additional commands HELP Provides information on how to use the user interface help QUIT Exits the Command Line User Interface Object class options available for defaul
88. 0000 plug in modules and components avoid contact with backplane components and module connectors 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide xiv Preface Data Security Disk units are fragile Handle them with care and keep them away from strong magnetic fields ALL the supplied plug in modules and blanking plates must be in place for the air to flow correctly around the enclosure and also to complete the internal circuitry If the SFA10000 or disk enclosure is used with modules or dummy disk modules missing for more than a few minutes the system can overheat causing power failure and data loss Such use may also invalidate the warranty If you remove a disk module replace it immediately If it is faulty replace it with a disk module of the same type and capacity Ensure that all disk modules are removed from the enclosure before attempting to move the rack installation Do not abandon your backup routines No system is completely foolproof 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide xv Table of Contents Preface Related Documentation 00 c ccc cece cece ce eee ene ee eee e ee eee tenet ee ee eee ees xii International Standards 0 0 c cece cece cece cece cece eee e eee e eee e eee e eee ee eee e eee e ees xii Potential for Radio Frequency Interference ce ceeeee eee ee ene eee e eee eeennees xii European Regulations cc c
89. 001 08025a000000000001c790000 Global Spare Pool 0x18d60013 Index 19 DiskTimeout FRT 10 minutes nit Policy ALLOW IO nit Priority 50 Verify Priority 70 Full Rebuild Priority 80 Fractional Rebuild Priority 90 Sparing Policy AUTOMATIC Verify Policy ENABLED Assign Policy Device Type NA Rotation Speed NA Raw Capacity NA SATAssure DIF Cache Settings ReACT TRUE IO Routing TRUE Mirroring TRUE Read Ahead TRUE Write Back TRUE nitializing FALSE Rebuilding FALSE Paused FALSE AutoWriteLock FALSE Critical FALSE Forced Write Thru FALSE Current Home 0x38000000 0x00000000 REMOTE Future Home Oxffffffff 0x00000000 Preferred Home 0x38000000 0x00000000 REMOTE Job OID NACTIVE Total Phy Disks 6 State NORMAL lember Size 2736 GB pID State UUID 0x0459 NORM 0x5000cca225c2b913 0x0329 NORM 0x5000cca225c2c89c 0x0462 NORM 0x5000cca225c2a53f 0x0466 NORM 0x5000cca225c2b738 0x046c NORM 0x5000cca225c2a653 0x0470 NORM 0x5000cca225c2b179 The SHOW POOL lt id gt PHYSICAL DISK command displays the list of disks associated with the specified storage pool Figure 77 Figure 77 Show Storage Pool Physical Disks Example Screen RR RK RK k kk F Physical Disk s ii KKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK Health Encl Slot Vendor Product ID Type Cap GB RPM Revision Serial Number Pool State Idx State WAN 1 37 HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS 136 15K A410 JEVWMZNC5 301 0 GOOD 611 NORM 5000cca00d3244
90. 02 OID 0x1d5f012e creation STATUS Success 0x0 eee ee 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 75 Presentations RAID 1 app create host name co test d08 ostype windows HOST 303 OID 0x1d60012f creation STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 1 application show host Stack Host Mode Attributes Index Host Name Index OS Type Characteristics 00304 co lsl 00000 LINUX 0x0000000000000001 00305 co test d10 00000 WINDOWS 0x0000000000000001 00306 co test d08 00000 WINDOWS 0x0000000000000001 Total Hosts 3 Recommendations e When creating host objects always include a descriptive name for the host objects that is easily recognizable This benefits the storage administrator in managing storage connectivity issues e The OS TYPE determines the flow control mechanism for host I O The Linux mode is appropriate for all versions implementations of Linux and UNIX The Windows mode is appropriate for all versions of the Windows operating systems Itis imperative that the OS TYPE is set to MAC OS for Apple MAC hosts The setup requirements involving MAC OS X hosts require additional steps and considerations Please see Section 3 6 5 Additional Configuration Considerations for Mac Hosts The NASScaler mode is used for NAS Scaler solution It fixes the EUI field in Mode Page 0x83 and 0x88 and allows Persistent Group Reservations The MS Cluster mode can be used for Microsof
91. 03 du Canada Safe Handling e Remove drives to minimize weight e Do not lift the enclosure by yourself e Do not lift the SFA10000 by the handles at the front and on the power supply modules on the back they are not designed to support the weight of the enclosure Safety NOTE _ If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired The SFA10000 MUST be grounded before applying power Unplug the unit if you think that it has become damaged in any way and before you Warning moveit CAUTION To maintain proper airflow through the system operate the system with the system top covers closed e Plug in modules are part of the enclosure and must only be removed when a replacement can be immediately installed The system must not be run without all modules in place e Inorder to comply with applicable safety emission and thermal requirements the top covers should remain closed while running e The SFA10000 system must only be operated from a power supply input voltage range of 200 VAC to 240VAC 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide xiii Preface e A faulty power supply or fan module must be replaced with a fully operational module within 24 hours To minimize the risk of electric shock disconnect the power from the power supply either by turning off the switch or by physically removing the powe
92. 0E Disk Enclosure 1 Top i osure 6 A Front of Rack A A Front of Rack Disk Enclosure 2 Disk Enclosure 7 A Front of Rack A A Front of Rack A Disk Enclosure 3 Disk Enclosure 8 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 A Front of Rack A A Front of Rack A Disk Enclosure 4 Disk Enclosure 9 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 A Front of Rack A A Front of Rack Disk Enclosure 5 Disk Enclosure 10 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 A Front of Rack A A Front of Rack A 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 178 E Zoning Configuration Procedure This appendix provides information on how to change the zoning configuration on an SS6000 enclosure and SS7000 enclosure E 1 S56000 Enclosures NOTE Change of zoning configuration on a disk enclos
93. 1 101ed0000 60 RC 04 Hndl 0065 PrntId 50001f 101led017 PHY 08 BT 00 14 DI 00000081 DSK 0000 000430 2011 10 28 14 39 13 8133330 G 10 5 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 5 LOG AMPD MPI SAS DEVICE APPEARED AMPD IOCO WWN 5000cca216ed8430 ES 50001 101ed0000 60 RC 03 Hndl 0065 PrntId 50001ff10led017f PHY 08 BT 00 14 DI 00000081 DSK 0000 e ICL problem link bounce 1 RP 0 VP 5 LOG AMPD ICL LINK STATUS CHANGE New UP 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG DUCK CONTROLLER CONNECTED 000468 2011 10 25 22 04 20 7729086 G 60 S 0 T AMPD Ctx 2 0006c24528 Drv 2 0006c2ed80 Old DWN 000469 2011 10 25 22 04 20 7729497 G 60 S 0 T DUCK Controller Connected e ICL problem controller failure 008418 2011 10 29 08 16 50 9043234 G 60 S 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG DUCK CONTROLLER DISCONNECTED DUCK Controller Disconnected E 7 008419 2011 10 29 08 16 50 9043363 G 60 S 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG ST OTHER DIED STATE OTHER CONTROLLER DIED er E RAID 0 show controller OID 0x38000000 Index 0000 Name A LOCAL PRIMARY Total Controllers 1 Refer to the DDN SFA Service Manual for a complete list of event log entries 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 131 5 3 96 00259 001 Manual Intervention Required MIR States Manual Intervention Required MIR States Manual Intervention Required MIR represents a condition with the controller that requires the user to provide a solution before proceeding with normal controller operations This
94. 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 170 Reliability Technical Specifications Redundant hot swappable cooling modules Redundant controllers Redundant disk enclosures Physical Power amp Environmental N 1 Dual redundant N 1 Active Active Dual Controllers S6000 Disk Enclosure SS7000 Disk Enclosure Dimensions Weight Voltage range Average power Average cooling Dimensions Weight Voltage range Average power Average cooling Dimensions Weight Voltage range Power Supply Height 14 356mm includes 2 UPS units Width 17 432mm Depth 25 5 648mm 120 Ibs 54 5 kg Controllers only 248 Ibs 112 5 kg with UPS units 200 240 VAC amp 47 63Hz 1200W 4095BTU hr Height 7 178mm Width 17 432mm Depth 36 914mm without bezel 42 1067 mm with cable management arms 240 Ibs 109kg with disk modules 120 Ibs 54 5 kg without disk modules 200 240 VAC amp 47 63Hz 1750W 5973BTU hr Height 6 97 177 mm Width 16 56 420 6 mm Depth 34 863 6 mm without bezel and cable management arms 38 965 2 mm with bezel and cable management arms 215 Ibs 97 7 kg with disk modules 105 Ibs 47 7 kg without disk modules 190 264 VAC 47 63Hz 1865W 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 171 Technical Specifications Physical Power amp Environmental 552460 Dimensions Height 3 5 890 mm Dis
95. 10000E controller has a dedicated Application Processor This processor is responsible for managing and running the Virtual Machines with each Virtual Machine receiving one or more CPU cores 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 9 The SFA10000 System Hardware 1 2 6 I O Ports Figure 10 and Figure 11 below illustrate the I O ports on the back of the SFA10000 and SFA10000E controllers respectively The InfiniBand ICL and Ethernet ICL ports provide connections for Mirrored Write Back Cache and control between the controllers in a couplet configuration The Disk I O Channels are used for disk enclosure connections The UPS port is used for UPS connection The RS 232 connector provides local system monitoring and configuration capabilities The VGA monitor and USB keyboard ports can be used as an alternative to the RS 232 console However the RS 232 console is recommended since its output can be logged and its connection distance can be longer Figure 10 SFA10000 Controller I O Ports 4 FC or 2 IB Host Ports InfiniBand ICL InfiniBand ICL E
96. 12 opt tgz and the IP address of the controller is 10 32 31 240 Replace these parameters with the filename and IP address appropriate for your installation 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 135 5 4 2 1 96 00259 001 Firmware Update Linux Environment Firmware Update from the Network Follow these steps to update the firmware 1 Copy the new firmware to both controllers using an scp or sftp client The user name is firmware and the password is Firmware Note that entries are case sensitive For example scp ddn flash 2812 opt tgz firmware 10 32 31 240 At the CLUI prompt enter command UPDATE FIRMWARE CONTROLLER LOCAL FILE lt file specification gt For example UPDATE FIRMWARE CONTROLLER LOCAL FILE ddn flash 2812 opt tgz Note that the file name must be enclosed with double quotation marks Upon completion of reboot login and enter the command SHOW CONTROLLER LOCAL ALL Verify that the firmware version is correct NOTE The pools may indicate there is a fault Issue the command SHOW POOLS to check the details of the pool The pools will go into write thru state on initial startup to allow the batteries the opportunity to charge The write thru mode is necessary to allow for data integrity until battery redundancy on each controller is completed If there is a battery issue the system will indicate replacement is required and all VDs will remain in write
97. 14 Home Screen 1 SHOW SUBSYSTEM NAME TIME NTP MODE NTPIPADDR NTPIPADDR NTPIPADDR NTPIPADDR SFA10000 Wed Oct 26 2 50 35 2011 In Figure 115 the Health Indicator is orange indicating a faulty condition The alert message below the Health Indicator indicates the component that requires attention Figure 115 Home Screen 2 SHOW SUBSYSTEM NAME TIME NTP MODE NTP IP ADDR NTP IP ADDR NTPIPADDR NTP IP ADDR SFA10000 Wed Oct 26 2 50 35 2011 ATTENTION REQUIRED Pai R Disks E Pools NOTE Refer to Section 5 3 Manual Intervention Required MIR States on page 132 and the SFA OS Service Manual for specific instructions on how to clear the MIR states 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 103 Subsystem Menu 4 2 Subsystem Menu Figure 116 shows the Subsystem menu Figure 116 Subsystem Menu Subsystem Initial Setup Wizard Restart Subsystem Set Background Job Attributes Set Subsystem Attributes Show Background Jobs Show Subsystem Shutdown Subsystem Update Email Settings 4 2 1 Show Subsystem To display the current status of the subsystem select Subsystem gt Show Subsystem Figure 117 illustrates an example of the Show Subsystem screen It shows the subsystem s attributes The color of the Health Indicator indicates the status of the subsystem Green indicates a healthy condition Figure 114 Orange indicates a faulty cond
98. 38 1 39 HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS 136 15K A140 JAVIYYAAS 301 0 GOOD 481 NORM 5000cca005039324 1 51 HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS 136 15K A410 JEVWLS5YC5301 0 GOOD 479 NORM 5000cca00d32293c 2 1 HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS 136 15K A410 JEVSUSPC5301 0 GOOD 483 NORM 5000cca00d2b4c48 2 3 HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS 136 15K A410 JEV8XYGC5301 0 GOOD 487 NORM 5000cca00d103e94 2 42 HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS 136 15K A410 JEVPKHUC5301 0 GOOD 477 NORM 5000cca00d273618 Total Physical Disks 6 Total Assigned Disks 6 Total Unassigned Disks 0 Total SAS Disks 6 Total Member State Normal 6 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 60 Storage Pool Management The SHOW POOL lt id gt VIRTUAL DISK command displays the list of virtual disks associated with the specified storage pool Figure 78 Figure 78 Show Storage Pool Virtual Disks Example Screen RAID 0 show pool 0 vd Home Background Idx Name State Pool Raid Cap GB Settings Jobs Current Preferred Job 0 vd 0_0 READY 0 5 3632 W x O L 0 O L 0 INACTIVE Total Virtual Disks 1 dd Creating a Storage Pool A storage pool on the SFA10000 has the following attributes e RAID Level RAID LEVEL Storage pools can be configured to use either a RAID 1 RAID 5 or RAID 6 parity scheme In RAID 1 the capacity of one disk is used for data duplication In RAID 5 the capacity of one disk is reserved for parity allowing data re
99. 4585 SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK06BXY00005005SDYV UNAS GOOD 170 READY 50000500104f7e5c 1 12 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO6SNV0000C0268B7K UNAS GOOD 193 READY 5000c500104ded34 1 13 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK08HZC0000C035HZ5Z UNAS GOOD 166 READY 5000c50020cble20 1 14 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK06C4N0000C0325YY2 UNAS GOOD 169 READY 5000c500104f8550 1 15 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK08JEBO0005018YULO UNAS GOOD 179 READY 5000c50020cb1158 1 16 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK06C3F0000C0326TSF UNAS GOOD 178 READY 5000c500104 7b78 1 17 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK068QL0000C035J0U4 UNAS GOOD 153 READY 5000c500104f1c94 1 18 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK089DZ0000C029F1JW UNAS GOOD 186 READY 5000c50020cb057c 1 19 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK06XHV0000C0212ZAD UNAS GOOD 230 READY 5000c50020c66c9c 1 20 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK08EB40000C0280TT5 2 GOOD 124 NORM 5000c50020caf780 1 21 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK071T70000C035HZX5 UNAS GOOD 194 READY 5000c500104f73ac 1 22 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO7RN20000C0372K9N UNAS GOOD 146 READY 5000c50020cb0414 1 23 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO081ZD0000C0372KB9 UNAS GOOD 200 READY 5000c50020cb2388 1 24 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO5P0G0000C0317LG8 2 GOOD 137 NORM 5000c500104c7600 1 25 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO6WNGO000C0365LAD UNAS GOOD 145
100. 47 71 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 196 disk fail a 86 failure recovery 155 fail clear 86 information 57 internal controller 9 listing all 56 location physical 82 replace manual 86 SATA power cycle 157 states 58 disk enclosure cable connections 23 DEM replace SS6000 166 T O module replace 165 see also enclosure zoning 179 disk failure recovery 155 disk map SFA10000E 178 disk module install 21 175 181 189 disk timeout 85 E email notification 97 enclosure replacing SS7000 168 Ethernet connection 96 event log 131 display 93 mark 95 structure 94 synchronize 95 terms 94 F failure disk fixing 155 fan controller 160 power supply controller 159 fan controller 8 controller replace 160 features system 3 field replaceable unit list of 173 firmware current version 135 update 134 update controller 135 update disk enclosure 139 update physical disk 143 Index floor loading 17 masking 50 fractional rebuild 85 MIR 132 FRU clear state 132 controller 173 conditions 132 SS2460 174 mirrored write back cache set 88 SS6000 173 SS7000 174 ING full rebuild 85 name set subsystem 38 G network interface change 96 Network Time Protocol 83 105 GUI 102 NTP set 83 105 H P host connect controller to 30 packing list 20 host presentation to 47 71 partial rebuild 85 g persistent reservation SCSI 73 physical location ICL 22 disk 82 import
101. 4K A410 J4V1YYAA5301 UNAS GOOD 280 READ ul 17 HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS 1863 5 4K A410 JEVWLSYC5301 UNAS GOOD 282 READ 1 18 HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS 1863 5 4K A410 JFVSUSPC5301 UNAS GOOD 277 READ T_T 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 145 UPS Maintenance 5 5 UPS Maintenance This section explains how to care for the SFA10000 s UPS and battery pack how to replace the battery pack and UPS and how to test the battery pack 5 5 1 UPS and Battery Pack Care The UPS contains a battery pack consisting of three batteries a frame and wiring The batteries have a useful life of between two and three years To insure that the UPS will operate when a power failure occurs the UPS battery pack should be replaced every 24 months even if the battery pack still tests okay If you store the UPS or a battery pack for a long period recharge the battery pack every six months by plugging the UPS into a power outlet To recharge a battery pack put it in a UPS and then plug the UPS into a power outlet The batteries charge to 90 capacity in approximately three hours However it is recommended that the battery packs be charged for 6 to 24 hours after long term storage 5 5 2 Checking the UPS Status The SHOW UPS ALL ATTRIBUTES command shows the battery manufacture date and the battery life remaining in days Figure 168 Figure 168 Show UPS Attributes KKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK w UPS s KK
102. 6 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 111 Unassigned Pool 4 5 Unassigned Pool By default all the disks or replacement disks are initially allocated to this pool When a disk has failed or been released from a spare pool for example it is also moved to this pool 4 5 1 Show Unassigned Pool Select Pools gt Show Unassigned Pool Figure 133 Figure 133 Pools Menu Pools Clear Fault Create Spare Pool Create Storage Pool Delete Spare Pool Delete Storage Pools Locate Spare Pools Locate Storage Pools Locate Unassigned Pool Move Pool Set Spare Pool Attributes Set Spare Pool Drive Assign Policy Set Storage Pool Attributes Show Spare Pools Show Storage Pools Show Unassigned Pool Verify Pools At the Show Unassigned Pool screen Figure 134 click on Total Members to display the list of disks in this pool Figure 134 Show Unassigned Pool Screen UNASSIGNED POOL SHOW UNASSIGNED POOL SHOW ALL PHYSICAL DISKS POOL NAME TOTAL MEMBERS TOTAL CAPACITY GB FAILED CAPACITY GB unassigned 64 8 INDEX PHYSICAL Te HEALTH graye MEMBER Pool CAPACITY Sor osure oa PRODUCTID REMBION SERKL NU 144 0x25ae0090 SATA 7200 Unassigned GOOD READY UNASSIGNED 18683 1 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1171YAGR6 143 0x25ad008f SATA 7200 Unassigned GOOD READY UNASSIGNED 1863 9 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA20N JK1170YAGR3 0x25c10097 SATA 7200 Unassigned
103. 6 0x20000000c98107cb 0x10000000c98107cb 00015 FC 00306 0x20000000c98107ca 0x10000000c98107ca 00016 FC 00305 0x20000000c9813a47 0x10000000c9813a47 00017 FC 00305 0x20000000c9813a46 0x10000000c9813a46 Total FC Initiators DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 79 Presentations 3 6 6 4 Present a Virtual Disk to a Host From your list of virtual disks that have been created identify the host that you wish to present this LUN to and create the presentation Example of list of candidate virtual disks for presentation RAID 1 show vd Home Background Idx Name State Pool Raid Cap GB Settings Jobs Current Preferred Job 49 vd 49 29 READY 29 6 1400 WI 1 L 0 1 L 0 INACTIVE 50 vd 50 30 READY 30 6 1400 WI O R 0 O R 0 INACTIVE 51 vd 51 31 READY 31 1 344 WI 1 L 0 1 L 0 INACTIVE 52 vd 52_32 READY 32 1 344 WI O R 0 O R 0 INACTIVE 53 vd 53 33 READY 33 5 1400 WI 1 L 0 1 L 0 INACTIVE 54 vd 54 34 READY 34 5 1400 WI O R 0 O R 0 INACTIVE 55 vd 55 35 READY 35 6 3608 WI 1 L 0 1 L 0 INACTIVE 56 vd 56 36 READY 36 6 3608 WI O R 0 O R 0 INACTIVE 57 vd 57 37 READY 37 5 3608 WI 1 L 0 1 L 0 INACTIVE 58 vd 58 38 READY 38 5 3608 WI O R 0 O R 0 INACTIVE 59 vd 59 39 READY 39 1 344 WI 1 L 0 1 L 0 INACTIVE 60 vd 60 41 READY 41 al 896 WI 1 L 0 1 L 0 INACTIVE Total Virtual Disks 12 Example of creating VD presentation to Windows host co test d10 not specifying SCSI LUN_ID The next two
104. 9 SHOW POOL lt pool id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 62 Storage Pool Management Figure 79 Show Storage Pool Details Example Screen TK KKK Pool s KKKKKKKKKK KKK KK Assign Policy Device Type SAS Rotation Speed NA Raw Capacity 136 GB SATAssure NONE To enable SATAssure enter the command SET POOL lt pool id gt SATASSURE PARITY DATA INTEGRITY FIELD where PARITY is the parity check on read option and DATA INTEGRITY FIELD is the data integrity field option To disable SATAssure enter the command SET POOL lt pool id gt SATASSURE NONE 3 3 4 Background Verify Scan The Background Verify Scan discovers and corrects on disk errors and inconsistencies before applications actually require the data This feature detects and corrects medium errors recovered errors and inconsistencies associated with parity and DIF data when the SATAssure DIF feature is enabled if sufficient redundancy exists in the pool A Background Verify Scan may be initiated on specific pools or on all pools and is transparent to the host applications The verify scan may be initiated as an one time scan on the specified pools or may be run continuously on the pools until it is disabled This background process can have an impact on the SFA10000 performance and includes a user configurable priority for internal system resources applied to the scan process
105. A request has been made to update physical disk firmware No attempt will be made to preserve redundancy if the physical disk resides in a pool If the update to the physical disk encounters catastrophic failure then this may result in lost data if the pool loses all of its redundancy It is recommended that a backup is done prior to this operation Are you sure you want to update physical disk firmware Yes PHYSICAL DISK 65535 OID Oxffffffff firmware update started STATUS An asynchronous command has been started 0x3000068 The controller has initiated the download operation which may take up to several minutes Check the progress and status of the download operation with SHOW PD n UPDATE FIRMWARE PROGRESS Additional information may be found in the event log 5 To monitor the upgrade progress enter command SHOW PD UPDATE FIRMWARE PROGRESS For example non matching drives omitted in output for clarity RAID 0 show pd update firmware progress Encl Slot Vendor Product ID Type Revision Serial Number Pool Idx WWN Complete Status HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS A410 JFVWMZNC5301 UNAS 271 50014ee2032d2555 5 In Progress 6 HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS A410 J4V1YYAA5301 UNAS 272 50014ee2032d196c 7 8 In Progress HITACHI HUS153014VL5300 SAS A410 FVWL5YC5301 UNAS 274 50014ee2032ca9a9 HITACHI HUS153014VLS300 SAS A410 JFVSUSPC5301 UNAS 269 50014ee25882b499 In Progress In Progress 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks
106. Controller 0xc2999211d0001 UPS battery at position 1 is nearing its end of life and should be replaced within 30 days The SHOW UPS command will show that the backup battery is in a NON_CRITICAL condition with a Health state of REPLACEMENT REQUIRED The SHOW UPS ALL command will show the days of life remaining e Ifthe battery life remaining is 0 or less it will log an error 000486 2011 11 12 12 54 52 3214473 G 61 S 2 T 1 RP 0 VP 01 LOG ES BATTERY END OF LIFE PASSED ES Controller 0xc2999211d0001 UPS battery at position 1 has reached its end of life 0 days ago and should be replaced immediately The SHOW UPS command will show that the backup battery is ina CRITICAL condition and has passed its end of life with a Health state of REPLACE The SHOW UPS ALL command will show the days of life remaining as a negative number with a Health state of REPLACE BATTERY NOTE Once the backup battery reaches its end of life the cached data is at risk The controller will automatically begin to flush all cached data and disable Write Back Cache In both cases the battery life remaining is reported should be replaced within N days Note that if the battery replacement is overdue then the error will read as something like 10 days ago These events will also be logged while the controller is running as they cross the thresholds a
107. Direct Networks facility which performs Warranty service in the country of original purchase or c an Authorized DataDirect Networks Third Party Service Provider in the country of original purchase 2 The Purchaser must provide proof of purchase and date of purchase from DataDirect Networks or an Authorized DataDirect Networks Reseller 3 The Purchaser may request information on how to obtain warranty service by contacting any Authorized DataDirect Networks Reseller or by writing to the Warranty Service Department DataDirect Networks 9351 Deering Avenue Chatsworth CA 91311 Disclaimers THIS LIMITED WARRANTY DOES NOT APPLY TO ANY DATADIRECT NETWORKS PRODUCTS WHICH HAVE BEEN DAMAGED OR RENDERED DEFECTIVE a AS A RESULT OF ACCIDENT MISUSE OR ABUSE b BY THE USE OF PARTS NOT MANUFACTURED OR SOLD BY DATADIRECT NETWORKS c BY MODIFICATION WITHOUT THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF DATADIRECT NETWORKS OR d AS A RESULT OF SERVICE BY ANYONE OTHER THAN DATADIRECT NETWORKS AN AUTHORIZED DATADIRECT NETWORKS SERVICING RESELLER OR AN AUTHORIZED DATADIRECT NETWORKS THIRD PARTY SERVICE PROVIDER EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH ABOVE DATADIRECT NETWORKS MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR PURPOSE AND DATADIRECT NETWORKS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES NOT STATED HEREIN IN THE EVENT THE PRODUCTS ARE NOT FREE FROM DEFECTS AS WARRANTED ABOVE THE PURCHASER
108. E eee ee I RP1 I eee eee l I Management I Network i I fi SS I a I I I RPO i i ee ee RE I i So I I Cy m I j A C3 DO O f WEMEL IIN e eao 1 i Gea Disk Channels Ethernet ICL y 4 FC or 2 IB Host Ports UPS VGA Monitor RS 232 Figure 11 SFA10000E Controller I O Ports Host Ports Disk Channels InfiniBand ICL ae a ee re I 1 Management OO PTE Ei f Network 4 L 2 Ce I bed I I I I i 1 2 I I SS Se Sa BESS Lao eS ae EE E EEE ER i Ty Te Ties a l 2 1 I I Ved LAT Le ax JO B 3 Host Ports Ethernet ICL Are KUE RS 232 eymoat VGA Monitor 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 10 The SFA10000 System Hardware The Management Network Ethernet port provides remote monitoring and configuration capabilities The colors of the LEDs indicate the link speed and activities Figure 12 Figure 12 Management Network Ethernet Port LED Color Scheme Link Act LED Color Status ra Speed Solid Orange 1000 Mb s T Solid Green 100 Mb s Off 10 Mb s Speed Link Activity Solid Green Link established and idle Flashing Green Link established and active aS Off Link down On the SFA10000 the RPO and RP1 host ports client channels provide 8 Fibre Channel or 4 InfiniBand host connections on each controller The LED color schemes are described in Figure 13 and Figure 14 On the SFA10000E there are 8 InfiniBand 10Ge host c
109. ES Controller UPS attribute 0 changed to 37 000003 2011 10 04 01 04 52 8320854 G 3 S 1 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG LOGDISK ENABLE RECEIVED FROM STATE LOG RECEIVED FROM STATE To display the event log starting at the start sequence number in descending sequence number order Figure 104 enter command SHOW CONTROLLER lt id gt LOG DESCEND Figure 104 Show Controller Log Example Screen 2 RAID 0 SHOW CONTROLLER 1 LOG DESCEND 000024 2011 10 11 05 08 48 7027390 G 0 5 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG JOI TIME SET JOI TIME WAS SET BY AN ADMINISTRATOR AT 2010 2 11 5 8 48 NEARBY LOG ENTRIES MAY APPEAR OUT OF TIME ORDER OFFSET 0X1C987C765CD3B2B 000023 2011 10 06 04 49 20 5069068 G 3 5 1 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG LOGDISK ENABLE RECEIVED FROM STATE LOGRECEIVED FROM STATE 000022 2011 10 06 04 49 20 4952631 G 0 5 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG JOI TIME SET JOI TIME WAS SET BY AN ADMINISTRATOR AT 2011 10 6 4 49 20 NEARBY LOG ENTRIES MAY APPEAR OUT OF TIME ORDER OFFSET 0X1C987C7A302483D To display the event log starting at the specified start sequence number in ascending sequence number order Figure 105 enter command SHOW CONTROLLER lt id gt LOG ASCEND START_SEQUENCE lt start sequence number gt Figure 105 Show Controller Log Example Screen 3 RAID 0 SHOW CONTROLLER 1 LOG ASCEND START SEQUENCE 20 000021 2011 10 06 04 49 20 4731906 G 4 S 2 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG_ST_MIR_STATE STATE MIR STATE STATE 000A 000022 2011 10 06 04 49 20 4952631 G 0
110. FAILED READY UNASSIGNED 1863 11 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1171YAGRD 0x25b00092 SATA Unassigned GOOD READY UNASSIGNED 1863 14 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1170YAGRP 0x25af0091 SATA Unassigned GOOD READY UNASSIGNED 1863 27 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1170YAGRP 0x25030095 SATA Unassigned GOOD READY UNASSIGNED 1863 29 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1171YAHOJF z 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 112 Unassigned Pool 4 5 2 Locate Unassigned Pool To locate the disks in the unassigned pool select Pools gt Locate Unassigned Pool Click on unassigned to display the disk map Figure 135 e Green color indicates a healthy disk that is available e White color indicates a healthy disk that has been assigned to either a storage pool or spare pool e Orange color indicates that the disk has failed Click LOCATE to flash the status LED on the unassigned disks Figure 135 Locate Unassigned Pool Screen STORAGE POOLS LOCATE UNASSIGNED POOL INDEX POOL NAME TOTAL MEMBERS TOTAL CAPACITY GB FAILED CAPACITY GB 65535 unassigned 8 8 Enclosure 1 Pool unassigned 53 54 41 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 113 4 6 4 6 1 96 00259 001 INDEX POOL NAMI Storage Pools Figure 136 Pools Menu Pools Clear Fault Create Spare Pool Create Storage Pool Delete Spare Pool Delet
111. HOW UNASSIGNED_POOL FAILED ALL Figure 178 Display Failed Disk RAID 0 show unassigned pool failed all OID 0x20a7003 Pool OID UNASSIGNED Capacity 704512 MBs 0x56000000 blocks Raw Capacity 715404 MBs 0x575466 0 blocks Block Size 512 Enabled Disk Ch 0x27 0x22 Physical Location C Disk Slot 1 42 at Enclosure 1 Disk Slot 42 Vendor ID Hitachi Product ID Hitachi HUA721075KLA330 Product Revision GK80ABOA Serial Number GTF200P8GBVPXF 4 Health State FAILED Rotation Speed 7200 RPM Device Type SATA Member State UNASSIGNED Spare FALSE Failed TRUE UUID 0x5000cca215c564560 To monitor the rebuild progress Figure 179 enter command SHOW JOB ALL ATTRIBUTES Figure 179 Display Rebuild Progress RAID 0 show job all attributes OID 0x2b050003 Target 0x19b40003 Type REBUILD Status RUNNING Priority 80 Fraction Complete 12 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 155 Recovery from Disk Failure To show the storage pool information Figure 180 enter command SHOW POOL lt id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES Once the rebuild is complete the status of storage pool will return to NORMAL Figure 180 Display Storage Pool Information RAID 0 show pool 3 all_attributes OID 0x19b40003 Type STORAGE Name raid 5 set Chunk Size 64KB 0x80 blocks Block Size 0x200 RAID Type RAID5 Free Ra
112. Host Ios SSS J Ports W With InfiniBand Host Ports Peers 199 9 NOT for i lt RP1 Host gt Host l I Ports Connections l i pE e E 1 RPO 1 2 l Host las SSS seeee l Ports 25 32 SFA10000E Connect the controllers host ports either directly to your file system clients or to a switch that connects your clients together The SFA10000E supports InfiniBand IB 10G Ethernet or a combination of the two The type of cable used depends upon your client network and application needs The required cables are shipped with your SFA10000E If not please contact DDN Technical Support The host ports are numbered as shown in Figure 32 For each host card on the controller the cables can be connected in one of the following configurations Port 1 Port2 1 IB IB 2 10Ge 10Ge 3 IB 10Ge 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 30 Cable Connections NOTE A combination of IB and 10Ge cables can only be used in one configuration 3 above Figure 32 Host Ports on SFA10000E Controllers Host Ports
113. ILABLE c Issue the command CLEAR CONTROLLER LOCAL UPS_HISTORY Then issue the command SHOW UPS ALL and you should see output similar to the following Battery Mfg Date Thu Sep 8 4 10 30 2011 Battery Life Remaining 730 days The CLEAR CONTROLLER UPS HISTORY command should only be used after receiving a new backup battery or UPS Entering this command at any other time will inadvertently Warning extend the life cycle of a bad unknown battery 5 5 4 1 Testing Batteries NOTE It is recommended that the battery pack be charged for 6 to 24 hours before testing Press and hold the KD button for 3 seconds to initiate a self test The 15 second test automatically distributes the load to the batteries and tests the battery pack s performance While the test is in progress the indicators cycle through and the alarm sounds Upon completion the UPS returns to normal mode as indicated by the and Load indicators If there is a problem with the battery pack the alarm beeps the indicator illuminates andthe indicator flashes Check the battery pack connections and be sure the battery pack is fully charged Call your service representative if the problem persists 5 5 5 Replacing the UPS Unit This procedure provides instructions on how to replace a UPS unit Prior to powering down the UPS the controller that is connected to the UPS must be properly shut down first 1 Identify the controller that is connecte
114. INFRINGE ANY THIRD PARTY PATENTS COPYRIGHTS TRADEMARKS OR OTHER RIGHTS COPYRIGHT HOLDERS WILL BEAR NO LIABILITY FOR ANY USE OF THIS SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION The name and trademarks of copyright holders may NOT be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to the software without specific written prior permission Title to copyright in this software and any associated documentation will at all times remain with copyright holders See the file AUTHORS which should have accompanied this software for a list of all copyright holders This file may be derived from previously copyrighted software This copyright applies only to those changes made by the copyright holders listed in the AUTHORS file The rest of this file is covered by the copyright notices if any listed below Copyright c 1992 1996 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose without fee and without written agreement is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice and the following two paragraphs appear in all copies of this software IN NO EVENT SHALL THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE AND ITS DOCUMENTATION EVEN IF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 96 00259 001 DataDirect Ne
115. ISK ENCL VENDOR prODUGTID SERIAL NUMBER DISK OID RPM STATE STATE GB SLOTOSURE jp REVISION 0x2Sae0090 SATA 7200 pool 21 GOOD READY NORMAL 1863 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1171YAGR63DS Ox 7c00Se SATA 7200 pool 16 GOOB READY NORMAL 1863 2 1 Hitachi HOS722020ALA330 JKAOA3ZEA JK1170YAGRWEXP 114 Ox 0072 SATA 7200 pool 18 GOOD READY NORMAL 1863 3 1 Hitachi HOS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1171YAHOHHSN 138 0x2938008a SATA 7200 pool 20 GOOD READY NORMAL 1863 4 1 Hitachi HOS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1171YAG82MRS 137 0x25 70089 SATA 7200 pool 20 GOOD READY NORMAL 1863 5 1 Hitachi HOS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1171YAG3HBRS 130 0x25400082 SATA 7200 pool 19 GGOB READY NORMAL 1863 6 1 Hitachi HOS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1171YAGVABVS 123 0x2590007b SATA 7200 pool 19 GOOD READY NORMAL 1863 7 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA20N JK1171YAHOPBSN 107 0x2584006b SATA 7200 pool 17 GOOD READY NORMAL 1863 8 1 Hitachi HOS722020ALA330 JKAOA20N JK1171YAHOHGON 143 0x25ad008f SATA 7200 pool 21 GOOD READY NORMAL 1863 9 1 Hitachi HOS722020ALA330 JKAOA20N JK1170YAGR3SVP 140 0x25a Sc SATA 7200 pool 20 GOOD READY NORMAL 1863 10 1 Hitachi HOS722020ALA330 JKAQA3EA JK1130YAGURULT 0x25ae0 PD OID 090 POOL OID Oxidbfoois Formatted Capacity 1824 GB Raw Capacity 1863 GB Available Disk Ch 01 NA NA NA 00 02 00 00 Enabled Disk Paths Oxlbs Oxlc4 Disk Slot 11 z NOTE If asterisks appear in the Physical Disk column when you attempt to
116. ISK 0x50001f210020000 0402 DDN 587000 inf if ma info ma 2 DISK 0x50001421002e000 0402 5 DISK 0x50001ff210026000 0402 DDN s7000 inf info ma info info 4 DISK 0x500017210036000 0402 DDN s7000 info info info info info 5 DISK 0x50001721003a000 0402 DDN 587000 inf info ma info if 6 DISK 0x50001f210038000 0402 DDN 887000 info info info info info p DISK 0x50001f21002c000 0402 DDN 587000 info info ma info info 8 DISK 0x50001f21001e000 0402 DDN 857000 info info info info info gt Show UPS The Show UPS function displays the status information of the UPS batteries Figure 163 NOTE The Battery Life Remaining field is not applicable to UPS units with Li lon battery installed Figure 163 Show Enclosure UPS Screen ENCLOSURES SHOW UPS BATTERY En CATE CHARGE INT HOLD EDI SES AC BATTERY BATTERY Lo PART FW FPGA PRESENT ENABLED nos ia SEN LeveL LOCATION PART SERIAL No STRING Version ENCLOSURE we D ae omp POSITION Mins STATUS FAILED HEALTH Mfg Date Left LURE be Version Version PW5115 LIFE Far Cont01 20 0 0x80000001 1 17 OK i 4 OK Pears EE 100 GD371A0852 1ue 01 02 PW5115 11 0x80000001 1 17 OK J J OK AEE AE 95 ae GD406A1105 er 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 128 Enclosures Menu 4 10 3 Update Enclosure Firmware You can update the disk enclosure firmware using the Update Enclosure Firmware function After you have
117. K KZMMNmN 1 EEE EEE EEE EEE ne ee 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 95 3 13 3 13 1 3132 5 13 5 Remote Management of SFA10000 Remote Management of SFA10000 The SFA10000 can be managed locally through the RS 232 interface or remotely via SSH The CLUI is the same regardless of the management interface RS 232 or SSH Network Connection Connect the Ethernet port on the back of the controllers to your Ethernet network Figure 107 Then configure the network interface as described below Figure 107 Ethernet Connections to Your Network Controller Your Management Network NOTE Currently the SFA10000 does not support network configuration protocols such as DHCP or BOOTP Display Network Interface Attributes To display the current network interface settings enter the command Figure 108 UI SHOW NETWORK INTERFACE LOCAL REMOTE Oj1j where LOCAL gives you information on the controller that you are currently logged into Figure 108 Current Network Interface Settings Screen RAID 0 ui show network interface local 0 Network device id 0 address 10 32 31 31 netmask 255 255 240 0 gateway 10 32 16 2 Change Network Interface Settings NOTE Initial network interface settings must be configured using the serial interface Refer to
118. KKKKKKKKKKK KK KK ae Subsystem ms KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK RP Subsystem Name SFA10000 UID 60001 0800a30000000000030000000 Subsystem Time Tue Oct 18 22 26 39 2011 Locate Dwell Time 240 seconds Enabled Licenses ID6 SATASSURE 5 Fast Timeout Oo Pool Verify Policy ENABLED Configuration Created Tue Oct 18 10 25 57 2011 NTP Mode Ol 10 32 16 24 10 32 16 25 Drive Error Tolerance HIGH Single Controller WB ENABLED Coupled Crash ENABLED When in NTP mode e The time is set between the two controllers under the following conditions when the controllers boot and discover each other whena SET SUBSYSTEM command is issued whether it is setting the time or not e Each controller will attempt to synchronize with the specified NTP servers If none of the servers are valid the time on each controller is free to drift independent of any other time source and independent of the other controller The SET SUBSYSTEM DATA AND TIME command will fail with a status of Setting date time while in NTP mode e Once the Clock code has finished calibration 100 seconds NTP will be started Both controllers will have the same NTP settings and so presumably will have synchronized time once NTP sets the time e Issuing anew SET SUBSYSTEM NTP command with a new set of IP addresses will stop and restart NTP 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 83 Network Time Protocol
119. KKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK Sub Index Sub OID 0x80000001 Enclosure Index 0 Enclosure OID 0x50000000 Position SES Status OK Charge Level 00 Hold Up Time Remaining 17 minutes Enabled TRUE AC Failed FALSE Present TRUE Interface Failed FALSE UPS Failed FALSE C Battery Health OK 3 Fault Indicator OFF Predicted Failure Ind OFF Locate Indicator OFF Battery Mfg Date Mon Sep 12 12 55 43 2011 Battery Life Remaining 365 days Part number PS5115 RM 1500VA Serial number GD371A0853 Firmware version Cont 01 20 Inve 83 74 If the Battery Health field shows OK the battery is in good condition When a new battery is needed the Battery Health field will display REPLACEMENT REQUIRED Other possible states are Temperature Fault Under Voltage Fault Charge Low and Temperature Warning Table 7 below describes the event log messages related to the UPS battery 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 146 UPS Maintenance Table 7 UPS Battery Even t Log Messages Event Pies Log Message Format New battery No ES Controller i New State n Prev State p Capacity x Fatal Fault f state Warning Fault w where e i controller ID n new state string STARTUP INIT IDLE CHARGE MAINT FAILED UPS p previous state string STARTUP INIT IDLE CHARGE MAINT FAILED UPS x remaining capacity value in f fatal fault value non zero values indicate fatal fault con
120. KKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK OID 0x2b220000 Index 0 Target POOL 0x199b0000 Index 0 Sub Target PD 0x21310087 Index 135 Type REBUILD State RUNNING Completion Status UNKNOWN Priority 80 Fraction Complete 52 Time NA You may specify the amount of system resources that should be devoted to a background job The higher its priority value the faster the background job will run and the more the background job will impact client I O performance To set the job priority enter the command SET JOB lt id gt PRIORITY lt priority gt where lt priority gt is anumber between 1 and 99 Note that PRIORITY is not a percentage or a mathematical fraction of the available resources For example two background jobs with priority values of 50 will not use 100 of the system resources The SFA10000 may or may not limit the number of background jobs to keep the total of their priorities below 100 EN 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 90 3 11 4 1 3 11 5 96 00259 001 Pause Resume a Job Performance Management You may pause a job at any time using the PAUSE JOB lt idx gt command Figure 98 Figure 98 Pause a Job RAID 0 pause job 0 JOB 0 OID 0x2b010000 OID Target Sub Target Type Status Completion Status Priority Fraction Complete Time paused with STATUS Janus Success RAID 0 show job 0 all 0x2b010000 Index 0 POOL 0x1a520000 Index 0 NA REBUI
121. LD PAUSED UNKNOWN 50 11 NA 0x0 To resume the job enter the command RESUME JOB lt id gt Figure 99 Figure 99 Resume a Job RAID 0 resume job 0 RAID 0 show job 0 all Priority 50 Time NA JOB 0 OID 0x2b010000 resumed with STATUS Janus Success OID 0x2b010000 Index 0 Target POOL 0x1a520000 Index 0 Sub Target NA Type REBUILD Status RUNNING Completion Status UNKNOWN Fraction Complete 11 0x0 Rebuild Policy Priority Each storage pool has its own rebuild policy settings You may specify the priority values for full rebuild and partial fractional rebuild policies To display the current settings enter the command SHOW POOL lt id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES Figure 100 Figure 100 Show Pool Information KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKK Pool s KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKK Index 3 OID 0x19b40003 Type STORAGE ame POOL 0 Chunk Size 64KB 0x80 blocks Block Size 512 RAID Type RAIDS Free RaidS Capacity 14576 GB lax VD Size 14576 GB Total Capacity 18240 GB UUID 60001 07607c00000000000186c0000 Global Spare Pool pool 6 DiskTimeout FRT 10 minutes nit Policy ALLOW IO nit Priority 50 Full Rebuild Priority 80 C Fractional Rebuild Priority 90 Sparing Policy AUTOMATIC DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 91 Performance Management Full Rebuild Priority To change the full rebuild priority value Figure 101 enter
122. LOG OF AUTO QUIESCED IOF AUTO QUI PD 00538 STS JS_AMPD_RECOVERED_ERROR 10C00 WWN 5000cca00915a574 ES 50001ff118460000 11 SD f000 011932 201E 19 34 28 3879951 Information LOG_AMPD_MPI_DSK_SCSI_SENSE_DATA AMPD SK 01 Info 073d46ca AL 18 CS 00000000 ASCQ 1701 0080000d 0000000000 PD 00538 ortga1 2 11 19 20 15 8144376 Information LOG_IOF_AUTO_QUIESCED 1OF AUTO QUI PD 00538 STS JS AMPD RECOVERED ERROR 10C00 WWN 5000cca00915a574 ES 50001f118460000 11 SD f000 011930 LAR 19 20 15 8144321 Information LOG AMPD MPI DSK SCSI SENSE DATA AMPD SK 01 Info 06f50c3f AL 18 CS 00000000 ASCQ 1701 0080000e 0000000000 PD 00538 Physical Disks Menu 4 4 Physical Disks Menu Figure 128 shows the Physical Disks pull down menu Figure 128 Physical Disks Menu Physical Disks Assign to Pool Clear Failed Locate Disks Remove From Spare Pool Set Failed Show Failed Disks Show Physical Disks Status Of Disk Firmware Update Update Disk Firmware 4 4 1 Show List of Physical Disks The Show All Physical Disks function displays the list of disks that are installed in the system Figure 129 Click on the disk to display its detailed information NOTE Ifthe disks are not visible when the system first starts up select Subsystem Restart from the Subsystem Menu to reboot the system Figure 129 Show Physical Disks Screen PHYSICAL DISK SHOW ALL PHYSICAL DISKS PRODUCT l INDEX PHYSICAL Type SPEED POOL NAME HEALTH FO MEMBER SPARE capacrty D
123. Mode e If NTP finds a time difference of more than 128 msec it will jump the time to the correct time This will result in a discontinuity in the event log logdisk syslog and anywhere that records a timestamp e NTP will always set the controllers to UTC Coordinated Universal Time There is no option to set time zones or otherwise change the offset from UTC When not in NTP mode e The master controller uses its time to set the time on the other controller The SET SUBSYSTEM DATE AND TIME command is used to set the time of both controllers together The system records time using the military method which records hours from 00 to 24 not in a m and p m increments of 1 to 12 Settings are automatically adjusted for leap years To change the system date and time to August 16 2011 2 15 32 pm for example type SET SUBSYSTEM DATE AND TIME 2011 8 16 14 15 32 e Once the time is set the time on the two controllers is free to drift independent of the other controller 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 84 Disk Rebuild 3 9 Disk Rebuild The SFA10000 s automatic disk failure recovery procedures ensure that absolute data integrity is maintained while operating in degraded mode 3 9 1 Full and Fractional Rebuilds Both full and fractional partial rebuilds are supported in SFA10000 Rebuilds are done at the storage pool level not the virtual disk level Fractional rebuilds will reduce
124. Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 129 Chapter 5 Support 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 130 This section describes common problems with possible solutions which can occur with the SFA10000 system 5 1 RAID 0 Prompt is not shown correctly The default CLUI prompt is RAID 0 If CLUI is shown instead of RAID 0 one of the following problems may have occurred e The firmware on this controller is in a MIR state and the MIR state needs to be resolved Refer to Section 5 3 Manual Intervention Required MIR States on page 132 for troubleshooting information e The CLUI has lost communication with the firmware or the firmware is not running A restart of the system is needed e There are multiple CLUI connections to the firmware already and there are not enough resources to allow another connection Only one CLUI connection is currently supported 5 2 Event Log Some types of issues can be seen from the event log e Background jobs affecting performance 014547 2011 10 31 12 30 08 1953906 G 62 S 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG ST MEMBER CHANGE STATE POOL MEMBER CHANGE INDEX 00000000 ID 0x5000cca20def4516 PDIDI 0085 MEMBER INDEX 0000 STATE REBUILD e Backend issues affecting performance 000425 2011 10 28 14 39 12 6963749 G 10 S 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 5 LOG_AMPD MPI SAS DEVICE DISAPPEARED AMPD IOCO WWN 5000cca216ed8430 ES 5000
125. OOL Figure 57 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 45 Figure 57 Show Spare Pool Example Screen 1 Configuring the SFA10000 RAIDS show spare pool Disk Total Total Storage Idx Name Blocks T O Cap GB PDs Pool Idx 6 spare pool l 512 10 120 1 Total Spare Pools 1 To display the detailed information of a spare pool Figure 58 use the command SHOW SPARE POOL lt id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES To display the list of disks in a spare pool Figure 58 use the command SHOW SPARE POOL lt id gt PHYSICAL DISKS 6 Assign spare pools to storage pools Enter the command Figure 58 Show Spare Pool Example Screen 2 RAIDS show spare pool 6 all attributes 6 Index OID 0x19bc0006 Type GLOBAL SPARE Name spare pool l Block Size 512 DiskTimeout FRT 10 minutes Total Capacity 120 GB UUID 0x0000000000000000 Total Phy Disks 1 Storage Pool List Total Spare Pools 1 RAIDS show spare pool 6 physical disks Health Enc1 Slot Vendor Product ID Pool State Idx State WWN 2 53 HITACHL 3 i ot Ste SKEE ae 6 SPARE 648 NORM SET POOL lt pool id gt SPARE POOL lt spare pool id gt where lt pool id gt and lt spare pool id gt are the index names of the storage pool and spare pool respectively Repeat this step for each storage pool Figure 59 Figure 59 Set Storage Pool to Spare Pool Example Screen RAID 0 set pool 0 spare pool 6 P
126. OOL 0 OID 0x19b40000 attributes set with STATUS Success 0x0 NOTE Each storage pool should have a spare pool assigned to it If a storage pool s attributes show Global Spare Pool UNASSIGNED no spare pool will serve this storage pool Use the SHOW POOL command to view the new storage pool information Figure 60 Figure 60 Show Pool Example Screen RAIDS show pool 1 all Index 0 OID 0x180d0000 Type STORAGE Name pool 0 Total Capacity 600 GB UUID 600000000000000000000180d0000 a Global Spare Pool 0x19bc0006 Index 6 DiskTimeout FRT 10 minutes DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 46 96 00259 001 Configuring the SFA10000 27 12 Present Virtual Disk to External Host not applicable to SFA10000E NOTE For SFA10000E this feature is not applicable Virtual disks are only presented to the hosts that have been given authorized access A Presentation on a SFA10000 has the following components e Discovered Initiators A Discovered Initiator is defined as a Fibre Channel or InfiniBand initiator that has logged into the SFA10000 This is normally a single port on a Fibre Channel or InfiniBand HBA in an external computer e Host A Host is an abstract client of a virtual disk that has access to all data within the virtual disk This most commonly represents an external computer with one or more Fibre Channel or InfiniBand initiators H
127. Only 5h MS or Type Exclusive Access 6h MS PROUT Release 02h MS PROUT Clear 03h MS PROUT Preempt 04h MS 3 6 5 Additional Configuration Considerations for Mac Hosts Apple Mac OS handles Fibre Channels Port Node WWNs uniquely Apple hosts expect node names to be unique across all subsystem ports All other OS s expect the FC node names to be the same across all subsystem ports Because of this uniqueness VD presentations must be uniquely set up when an Apple Mac presentation is being made from a SFA10000 subsystem NOTE You MUST create the host object with OSTYPE MAC for Mac hosts You must identify at least one controller port channel preferably one controller port for each SFA10000 controller on the storage subsystem as operating in the MAC mode APPLICATION SET CHANNEL 0 1 2 3 MODE MAC NOTE Setting changing the mode of a channel will require a shut down restart of the controller for the change to actually take place 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 73 Presentations If a MAC presentation is being made from the subsystem NO other VD from this subsystem should be presented to ALL hosts In a SAN and or MIXED OS environment of Mac and other operating systems create the presentations as follows APPLICATION CREATE PRESENTATION VD lt vd id gt HOST lt host_index gt ENABLE NONE This will disable channels through which to make a presentatio
128. Pool To create a spare pool select Pools gt Create Spare Pool At the Create Spare Pool screen Figure 151 select the drive size spindle speed and drive type for the pool Figure 151 Create Spare Pool SPARE POOLS CREATE SPARE POOL SPARE POOL NAME TOTAL MEMBERS DISK TIMEOUT Mins TOTAL RAW CAPACITY GB spare_pool 3 2 10 1808 Select drive size DONT CARE F Select spindle Speed DONT CARE E Select drive type DONT CARE Click NEXT to bring up the Create Pool Advanced screen Figure 152 Check to select the disks to add to the pool to be created Click CREATE SPARE POOL to create the pool NOTE When assigning disk drives to a spare pool that is to be assigned to a given storage pool be sure to select a disk that is as large or larger than any disks in the assigned storage pool 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 122 Spare Pools Figure 152 Select Disks for Spare Pool STORAGE POOLS CREATE SPARE POOL ADVANCED z AS 6 a SAS SAS SAS s 1 2 3 E E BACK CREATE SPARE POOL CANCEL 4 8 4 Assign Spare Pool to Storage Pool To assign a spare pool to a storage pool select Pools gt Set Spare Pool Drive Assign Policy At the Spare Pool Drive Assign Policy screen Figure 153 make the desired changes and click UPDATE to save the changes NOTE Each storage pool should have a spare pool assigned to it If the Selec
129. R IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide xi 96 00259 001 Preface What is in this guide Preface This user guide contains comprehensive information regarding features and functions of the DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E system It also gives you step by step instructions on how to install and configure the system Information given in this user guide applies to both the SFA10000 and SFA10000E systems unless otherwise stated Related Documentation SFA OS CLUI Command Reference SFA10000 Quick Start Guide SFA10000 Release Notes StorageScaler 6000 User Guide StorageScaler 7000 User Guide StorageScaler 2460 User Guide 42U 45U 28 Wide Rack Installation and Service Guide SFA10000 White Paper SFA OS Service Manual International Standards The SFA10000 complies with the requirements of the following agencies and standards CE UL CUL C Tick FCC Potential for Radio Frequency Interference USA Federal Communications Commission FCC This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used
130. RC CHANGED Controller power source has changed LOG ES ENCL UPS WARN BATT UPS for the controller indicates that its battery should be replaced LOG ES ENCL UPS WARN INTF UPS for the controller indicates that its interface has failed Check the cable LOG ES ENCL UPS WARN UPS UPS for the controller indicates that it has failed LOG ES EXPANDER ELEMENT ERROR A DEM or an I O module has reported an error condition LOG ES POWER SUPPLY ERROR The power supply for one of the enclosure within the subsystem reported error condition LOG ES SET BATTERY CHARGER FAILED Attempt to set controller battery charger current and voltage failed LOG ES TEMPERATURE SENSOR ERROR The enclosure temperature sensor has reported an error condition LOG ES UPS CLIENT IS NOT RESPONSIVE Controller enclosure UPS is not responsive Check the USB cable between the UPS and controller LOG ST HEARTBEAT MISMATCH Heartbeat mismatch reboot LOG ST MIR STATE Manual Intervention Required state LOG ST MIRROR JOIN FAIL Other controller unable to flush mirror data status LOG ST NO CONFIG READ Unable to read the configuration from backend drives status LOG ST NO CONFIG WRITE Unable to write the configuration to backend drives status LOG ST POOL CHANGE Pool state changed LOG ST SET AWL Auto Write Lock condition LOG ST SET CRITICAL Crit
131. SFA 2 shutdown controller 87 subsystem 87 site preparation 15 SNMP set up 98 spare pool create 45 70 delete 70 display 69 global 69 name change 70 view list of 67 sparing policy 85 specifications technical 170 SSH 96 SS6000 disk map 178 storage pool configuration checking 59 create 41 61 delete 65 initialization 64 list of view 59 locate 82 location physical 66 name change 65 sparing policy 85 status 59 verify 63 subsystem mark event log 95 synchronize log disk 95 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 198 Index y technical specifications 170 technical support contacting 199 Telnet 96 terminology 194 time set system 83 U unassigned location physical 82 unassigned pool 56 UPS 12 battery pack replace 146 battery connect 32 connect to controller 32 DIP switch 33 test batteries 152 v verify scan 63 version information 135 virtual disk assign to host 75 associated with storage pool view 61 counters 89 create 43 67 delete 68 name change 67 status checking 66 visual indication disk 82 storage pool 66 unassigned pool 82 YY wedged disk troubleshoot 157 write back cache set 88 LZ zoning configuration disk enclosure 179 Contacting Technical Support amp Shipping Instructions You can contact DataDirect Networks Technical Support by Telephone at 1 888 634 2374 North America 1 818 718 8507 International Internet email at s
132. SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK04XPX0000C030JNQV UNAS GOOD 167 READY 5000c50010468258 1 41 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK06X410000C031DRBQ UNAS GOOD 226 READY 5000c500104fdfa4 1 42 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 QWKO7XATOOOOCO214TUW UNAS GOOD 155 READY 5000c50020cb0e18 1 43 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK08RZKO000C030EKKL 2 GOOD 129 NORM 5000c50020cafdec 1 44 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO6PDX0000C032H8PR UNAS GOOD 149 READY 5000c0500104c07a4 1 45 SEAGATE ST3100042455 SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK06AWC0000C029 82U UNAS GOOD 216 READY 5000c500104ee58c 1 46 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK0763Z0000C036115H UNAS GOOD 185 READY 5000c500104f6ca0 1 47 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK075RV00005006TKO8 UNAS GOOD 182 READY 5000c500104 62a0 1 48 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO6LRGO000C0294GYC UNAS GOOD 168 READY 5000c050020060248 1 49 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO4SMH0000C0214THP UNAS GOOD 171 READY 5000c50010486 74 1 50 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO6NMJ0000C0358Q71 UNAS GOOD 211 READY 5000c500104c9ac0 1 51 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO6WHHO000C03190PT UNAS GOOD 215 READY 5000c50020c62dbc 1 52 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK05Y7P0000C0366HN6 UNAS GOOD 225 READY 5000c50020c62dd0 1 53 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK0772L0000C0368V85 UNAS GOOD 162 READY 5000c50020c62518 Total Physical Disks 300 Total Assigned Disks 22 Total Unassign
133. Sa Z NONE re 1 B 1 4 2 8540 0000 RUNNING LOCAL ff Pay 4 NONE JE SET CONTROLLER ATTRIBUTES Set attributes for A controller Log disk Enabled Disabled UPDATE DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 108 Controllers Menu 4 3 3 Update Controller Firmware You can update the controller firmware using the Update Firmware function After you have obtained the new firmware files select Controllers gt Update Firmware At the Update Firmware screen Figure 125 locate the firmware file and click UPDATE FIRMWARE Then follow the onscreen instructions to complete the update Also refer to Section 5 4 2 Controller Firmware Update Procedure on page 135 for detailed instructions Figure 125 Update Controller Firmware Screen CONTROLLERS UPDATE FIRMWARE l r l UP TIME RESTART LOGDISK MANUAL INDEx CONTROLLER FIRMWARE HARDWARE LOGALREMOTE PRIMARY days CRASHDUMP NTP NAME VERSION VERSION STATE emmy ee ENABLED ENABLED INTERVENTION sync 1 B 1428540 0000 RUNNING LOCAL Er y 7 None other UPDATE FIRMWARE FOR CONTROLLER B Select Firmware file Browse NOTE In order to update the other controller connect to the other controller using the gui and follow the same steps UPDATE FIRMWARE 4 3 4 View System Logs To view the system logs select Controllers gt View Log At the View Log Entries screen Figure 126 enter the d
134. Section 2 7 7 Configure Network Interface Settings for instructions To change the network interface settings on the controller you are connected to enter the command Figure 109 UI SET NETWORK INTERFACE LOCAL 0 IP ADDRESS lt ip address gt IP MASK lt netmask gt IP GATEWAY lt gateway gt Figure 109 Set Network Interface Example RAID 0 ui set network interface local 0 ip address 10 32 31 31 ip mask 255 255 240 0 ip gateway 10 32 16 2 NETWORK INTERFACE 0 set with STATUS Success 0x0 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 96 Remote Management of SFA10000 3 13 4 Logins By default the login name is user and its password is user Figure 110 Both are case sensitive Only one SSH session is permitted at a time Once a SSH session is initiated the RS 232 console switches to a CLI sub shell The SSH client should be using port 22 with its local echoing function disabled Figure 110 SSH Login Screen login as user user 10 23 23 16 s password Linux none 2 6 25 ddn 016620 3 2 SMP Tue Oct 18 10 38 28 MST 2011 x DataDirect Networks SFA10000 tm J Logout To logout enter command QUIT For SSH connection the current session will be disconnected 3 135 Email and SNMP Notification Setup 31251 Email Setup There is only one logical EMAIL AGENT for the subsystem While each controller has an EMAIL AGENT the two are ideally managed as a single logi
135. Storage Fusion Architecture SFA10000 10000E Version 1 4 2 User Guide Important Information Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of DataDirect Networks Inc No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying and recording for any purpose other than the purchaser s personal use without the written permission of DataDirect Networks Inc 2011 DataDirect Networks Inc All rights reserved DataDirect Networks the DataDirect Networks logo D MAID DirectOS EXAScaler GRIDScaler Silicon Storage Appliance S2A xSTREAMScaler Information in Motion NoFS ObjectAssure Web Object Scaler WOS SATAssure Storage Fusion Architecture SFA are registered trademarks or trademarks of DataDirect Networks Inc All other brand and product names are trademarks of their respective holders DataDirect Networks makes no warranties express or implied including without limitation the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose of any products or software DataDirect Networks does not warrant guarantee or make any representations regarding the use or the results of the use of any products or software in terms of correctness accuracy reliability or otherwise The entire risk as to the results and performance of the product and software are assumed by you The
136. T CBL10KSS SAS cable kit to connect controller to disk enclosures includes 8 x 2 meter cables and 12 x 3 meter cables CBL MSMS 1M 1 meter SAS cable to connect controller to disk enclosure CBL MSMS 2M 2 meter SAS cable to connect controller to disk enclosure CBL MSMS 3M 3 meter SAS cable to connect controller to disk enclosure CBL MSMS 4M 4 meter SAS cable to connect controller to disk enclosure CBL MSMS 5M 5 meter SAS cable to connect controller to disk enclosure DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 173 FRU Part Numbers S56000 Disk Enclosure FRU FRU Part Number Unit per Description Enclosure CBL MSMS 6M 6 meter SAS cable to connect controller to disk enclosure 601 BLANK Empty slot filler for enclosure SS7000 Disk Enclosure FRU FRU Part Number gnit per Description Enclosure FRU SS7K RK 1 Adjustable rail kit FRU SS7K CMA 1 Cable management arms FRU SS7K PS 2 1865 Watt Power supply module FRU SS7K IO 2 1 0 module FRU SS7K KIT Spares kit includes 1 x 1865W power supply module and 1 x I O module KIT CBL10KSS Mini SAS cable kit to connect an SFA10000 singlet or a SFA10000E couplet to 5 x 60 bay enclosures Also used to connect SFA10000 couplet to 5 x 24 bay enclosures includes 2 x 2 meter cables and 18 x 3 meter cables CBL MSMS XM Cable kit includes various length of mSAS mSAS cables to connect SFA10000 singlet to 60 bay enclosures SS7K BLANK Empty slot filler
137. T OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES 17 Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16 If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide ix Important Information END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms To do so attach the following notices to the program It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found lt one line to give the program s name and a brief idea of what it does
138. TIMEOUT lt timeout gt where lt timeout gt is in the range of lt 0 240 gt minutes The default setting is 10 3 9 2 Sparing Policy Each storage pool has a sparing policy that determines what happens when a physical disk within the pool fails or becomes inaccessible In the event of a disk failure the SFA10000 will automatically initiate a disk rebuild if the sparing policy is set to automatic and a spare pool has been assigned to the storage pool Use the SHOW POOL lt id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES command to display the current settings Figure 93 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 85 Disk Rebuild Figure 93 Show Pool All Attributes RAID 0 show pool 0 all Index 0 OID 0x1a520000 Type STORAGE UUID 60001 07607c00000000000186c0000 K Global Spare Pool Oxlaca000e Index 14 DiskTimeout FRT IO minutes Init Policy ALLOW IO Init Priority 503 Full Rebuild Priority 80 Fractional Rebuild Priority 90 4 Sparing Policy AUTOMATIC 2 To change the sparing policy setting use this command SET POOL lt id gt SPARING POLICY AUTOMATIC MANUAL The default setting is automatic which is recommended A rebuild operation can take up to several hours to complete depending on the size of the disk and rate of rebuild Refer to Section 3 11 5 Rebuild Policy Priority on page 91 for information on how to adjust the rate of rebuild 3 9 3 Manual Disk Repl
139. TINGS E mail Agent Attributes IP_ADDRESS 192 168 11 137 IP_PORT 23 UPDATE EMAIL SETTINGS Update IP Address fi92 168 11137 Update IP Port i Update From SFA10K ddn com Update To service ddncom Update Subject DDN SFATOK Event Notification UPDATE In the Update IP Address field enter the IP address of the SMTP server to which the SFA10000 will send email notifications In the Update IP Port field enter the IP port of the SMTP server to which the SFA10000 will send email notifications In the Update From field maximum field size 512 enter an identification string such as the name of the controller This is a string which will be included on the From line of the email notification message sent by the agent In the Update To field maximum field size 512 enter an Internet Mail Format RFC2822 email address to which SFA10000 will send email notifications In the Update Subject field maximum field size 512 enter a string to be included on the subject line of the email notification sent by the email agent Click UPDATE to save the changes The tables listed in Section 3 13 5 3 Inquiry Items and Events on page 98 detail the additional inquiry items and events that will be trapped in the SNMP MIB and in the Email Agent 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 107 4 3 4 3 1 4 3 2 96 00259 001 Controllers Menu Controllers Menu Figure 122 shows the Co
140. UPS is a rack mountable 1U unit Figure 15 below illustrates the positions of all the control buttons and LED indicators on the front panel The DIP switches on the back panel are set at the factory and should only be changed by a DDN field engineer Figure 16 Figure 15 UPS Front View ___ A AER Ww or A i SSS EN SE er es en 4 Load Segment 2 Green Test Alarm Reset Load S t 1 Yell Power OK Green CAC Segmenti Erow On Battery Yellow Service Red Overload Red Figure 16 UPS Rear View 28009 Q000 Wc0000 00000 OBARe00dddeG eS lo 1 JOP 388 88 OP 2 Gl 2990 a 00088 e a oe USB Connection to Controller Load Segment 1 Load Segment 2 DIP Switches not used en en eS ee ee ee ee ee 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 12 Chapter 2 Installation 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 13 Installation Overview 2 1 Installation Overview Here is an overview of all the steps needed to be taken to complete an installation and configuration of an SFA10000 10000E system NOTE All installation procedures apply to both the SFA10000 and SFA10000E systems unless stated otherwise 1 Site preparation 2 Unpack the system 3 Install the disk modules into the disk enclosures 4 Connect the cables
141. UPS to Controller To PDU To PDU 2561 UPS Battery Controller 0 AC Power Cable Controller 0 s USB Cable UPS Controller 1 Controller 1 s UPS The UPS units are shipped with the batteries disconnected Follow these steps to connect the batteries 1 Remove the front bezel of the unit 2 Fasten the two connectors together Figure 36 Note that it is normal if you see a spark and hear a pop sound as you connect the battery 3 Replace the front bezel 4 Repeat the above steps on the other UPS Figure 36 Connect UPS Battery 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 32 Powering On the System 2 5 7 Power Connections 1 Verify your AC power source by measuring the AC voltage 2 Refer to the illustrations in Figure 37 and verify that the DIP switches on the back of both UPS units are correctly set NOTE Changing the voltage of the UPS requires more steps than just changing the DIP switches If the settings are incorrect have a DDN field engineer correct them Figure
142. Version Release 1 4 2 lt q _ _ _ _ _ Firwmare Release Version Source Version 8250 DDN lt q Code Base Version Fully Checked In Yes Private Build No Build Type Production Build Date and Time 2011 10 18 15 38 UTC Builder Username root Builder Hostname co bs2 Build for CPU Type AMD 64 bit Hardware Version 0000 State RUNNING Name A Controller LOCAL PRIMARY Controller ID 0x0001 0800a30000 g ID used for Key Generation Enclosure OID 0x50000006 Index 6 Universal LAN Address 0x00000001ff0800a3 MIR Reason None State of Controller None is good NTP Sync other controller Controller Firmware Update Procedure The firmware update procedure described here only applies to upgrades from firmware version 1 0 3 3 xxxx or later to a new version Upgrades from an older version of firmware must be done by a trained technician NOTE The SFA10000 now supports an upgrade of the firmware while the system is still online However you must correctly follow the upgrade instructions to perform a successful online upgrade If you are upgrading from v1 0 3 3 xxxx or later there are two methods that can be utilized e Copy the new firmware image over to the controller via the network instead of using a USB flash disk for Linux e Copy the new firmware image over to the controller via the network for Windows users NOTE In the examples the filename of the firmware image is ddn flash 28
143. ace Rebuild If a storage pool does not have a spare pool assigned to it it becomes necessary to manually add a disk to the storage pool to replace a failed disk To add a disk to a storage pool to replace a failed disk use this command ASSIGN PHYSICAL DISK lt id of disk to be added gt TO POOL lt pool id gt SET SPARE The disk will be put into the storage pool as the spare disk and it will be used in the storage pool to replace the failed disk 3 9 4 Manual Fail Rebuild of a Disk The SET PHYSICAL DISK lt disk id gt FAILED command instructs the system to fail the specified disk When a non SPARE disk is specified and it is failing the disk will not cause a multi channel failure The disk is marked as failed An attempt is made to replace it with a spare disk When a SPARE disk is specified it is released but marked as unhealthy and unavailable CLEAR PHYSICAL DISK lt disk id gt FAILED changes the specified disk s Failed state to FALSE After clearing a disk use the ASSIGN PHYSICAL DISK lt disk id gt TO POOL lt pool id gt SET SPARE command to add the disk back to the storage pool it was failed from If the command is successful it will initiate a rebuild operation 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 86 Power Cycling the SFA10000 3 10 Power Cycling the SFA10000 3 10 1 Reboot Restart The SHUTDOWN CONTROLLER LOCAL REMOTE 0 1 RESTART command performs a restart on th
144. ally to all channel initiator and other application settings Presentation A Presentation is the relationship between a Host and a virtual disk A Presentation implies that the related Host has some sort of access to the virtual disk Attributes of a Presentation are PORT from which the host will see the virtual disk READ_ONLY controls read only access PRESENT_HOME_ONLY presents the specified virtual disk from its designated home controller only LUN user specified LUN number that the virtual disk will show to the host NOTE When there are no presentations mapping to LUN 0 for a host SFA OS will present a controller LUN processor a LUN 0 of SCSI peripheral device type 03h 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 71 Presentations 3 6 1 Discovered Initiator Commands To map a host to a discovered initiator use the command APPLICATION IMPORT DISCOVERED INITIATOR lt initiator id gt HOST lt host id gt To display the currently available initiators use the command APPLICATION SHOW DISCOVERED INITIATOR To display the attributes of a specified initiator use the command APPLICATION SHOW DISCOVERED INITIATOR lt initiator id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES 3 6 2 Imported Initiator Commands To create an application initiator for the specified host use the command APPLICATION CREATE INITIATOR HOST lt host id gt WWPN lt integer gt To delete the specified initiator use
145. am if necessary For more information on this and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL see lt http www gnu org licenses gt The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs If your program is a subroutine library you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library If this is what you want to do use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License But first please read lt http www gnu org philosophy why not Igpl html gt Copyright C 1997 Massachusetts Institute of Technology This software is being provided by the copyright holders under the following license By obtaining using and or copying this software you agree that you have read understood and will comply with the following terms and conditions Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee or royalty is hereby granted provided that the full text of this NOTICE appears on ALL copies of the software and documentation or portions thereof including modifications that you make THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND COPYRIGHT HOLDERS MAKE NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED BY WAY OF EXAMPLE BUT NOT LIMITATION COPYRIGHT HOLDERS MAKE NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR THAT THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION WILL NOT
146. an 10 volts then the UPS firmware version should be Cont 01 20 Inve 01 02 Ifboth voltages X G and Y G are greater than 10 volts then the UPS firmware version should be Cont 01 20 Inve 83 74 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 19 Unpacking the SFA10000 2 3 Unpacking the SFA10000 The SFA10000 system components are already installed in the rack s if you ordered the controllers and disk enclosures with the racks Refer to the DDN 42U 45U 28 Wide Rack Installation and Service Guide for detailed instructions on removing the rack from the shipping crate and positioning the rack Refer to Appendix F Rack Installation Procedure if you need instructions on how to install a SFA10000 controller or UPS unit into a rack 2 3 1 Packing List The SFA10000 ships with the following e Installed in the rack s Two controllers Two UPS units Four l meter Ethernet ICL cables Two 1 meter InfiniBand ICL cables Two USB cables Forty SAS cables Five ten or twenty disk enclosures Disk modules e Two serial cables e Two Ethernet cables SFA10000 Quick Start Guide SFA10000 User Guide 42U 45U 28 Wide Rack Installation and Service Guide SFA OS CLUI Command Reference Release Notes 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 20 2 4 Installing the Disk Modules Installing the Disk Modules The disk modules are shipped separately from the disk enclosur
147. and will display the status information of the temperature sensors RAID 1 show temp rs skr skr aa skr aa skr sr skr sr sr or ar skr aar skr or X Temperature Sensor s i kr skr sr aske ar skr sr skr sr ar rar rar Over Temp Indicators Idx Enc1 Pos Temp C Present Warning Failure Failure Locate Location SES Status 24 TRUE FALSE FALSE OFF OFF PCM A OK 1 1 I 2 25 TRUE FALSE FALSE OFF OFF PCM B OK Sensors 1 3 27 TRUE FALSE FALSE OFF OFF IOMA OK inside 1 4 28 TRUE FALSE FALSE OFF OFF IMB OK 552460 1 5 21 TRUE FALSE FALSE OFF OFF MP RIGHT OK TAE 20 TRUE FALSE FALSE OFF OFF MP LEFT OK DUB WNE Tee 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 193 H Terminology AP Application Processor Application A layer of SFA OS that provides services external to the SFA appliance through the use of Stack Virtual Disks For example Fibre Channel block device Client Channel A port on a Client I O Controller that can be used by hosts to communicate with an Application Stack Client I O A physical interface FC or IB that has a unique PCI bus number and is utilized for one or Controller more Client Channels A Client I O Controller is managed by a single Application Stack Couplet Dual controller subsystem Discovered A volatile object that represents an FCP or SRP initiator port that is discovered on the fabric Initiator Disk Channel A port ona Disk I O Controller that can be connected to one or
148. ans a major essential component kernel window system and so on of the specific operating system if any on which the executable work runs or a compiler used to produce the work or an object code interpreter used to run it The Corresponding Source for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate install and for an executable work run the object code and to modify the work including scripts to control those activities However it does not include the work s System Libraries or general purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work For example Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work 2 Basic Permissions All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run t
149. are the two RAID processors on Controller 1 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 72 Presentations LUN lt integer gt where the integer is a Logical Unit Number LUN that will be used to present the associated virtual disk to the associated Host NOTE Each LUN integer entered for a presentation is cumulative and does not replace the previous entry HOME _ONLY TRUE FALSE which enables disables the home only parameter READ ONLY TRUE FALSE which enables disables the read only parameter 3 6 4 1 Persistent Reservation Support SCSI 2 Persistent Reservation commands support is included for legacy host file system SFA OS receives either a SCSI 2 RESERVE RELEASE or SCSI 3 PRIN PROUT and responds with the proper type SCSI 2 or SCSI 3 SFA OS will not allow SCSI 2 and SCSI 3 reservation styles to be mixed on the same LUN Attempting to do so will return reservation conflicts Note that a promiscuous host may not be used with persistent reservations In the following command if lt host id gt is ALL you have a promiscuous host APPLICATION CREATE PRESENTATION VD lt VD id gt HOST lt host id gt SFA OS V1 4 2 0 includes the following commands e SCSI 3 Persistent Reserve In PRIN Read Keys 00h MS PRIN Read Reservation 01h MS PRIN Report Capabilities 02h PRIN Read Full Status 03h e SCSI 3 Persistent Reserve Out PROUT Reserve 01h Scope LU_SCOPE 0h Type Write Exclusive Registrants
150. ataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 154 5 6 5 6 1 Recovery from Disk Failure Recovery from Disk Failure Automatic Rebuild A single disk failure in any storage pool does not result in data loss The virtual disk s on that storage pool will continue to operate in degraded mode If a spare disk is available and automatic rebuild is enabled the SFA10000 will automatically rebuild the data to a spare disk NOTE System performance will be impacted while recovery is taking place When a disk failure occurs the failure is written to the event log You may monitor the rebuild progress or adjust the rebuild rate to match the user load requirements To display the event log Figure 177 use the SHOW CONTROLLER LOCAL LOG command Figure 177 Display Event Log State Change RAID 0 show controller local log on Pool 0003 000041 2011 10 04 15 03 17 7295774 G 4 S 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG_ST_POOL_CHANGE STATE POOL CHANGE POOL 0003 STATE 0005 Disk Replacement 000042 2011 10 04 15 03 17 7295780 G 4 S 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG ST MEMBER CHANGE STATE MEMBER CHANGE 1D 5000cca215c56e02 PDIDI 0145 i POOL 0003 INDEX 0000 STATE 0003 Rebuild Initiated 000043 2011 10 04 15 03 17 7295810 G 4 S 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 a on Spare Disk 5 LOG_ST_REBUILD START STATE REBUILD START ID 5000cca215c56e02 PDIDI 014 POOL 0003 INDEX 0000 FENCE 0000000000000000 To look at the failed disk Figure 178 enter command S
151. ations To create a storage pool select Pools gt Create Storage Pool At the Create Storage Pool screen Figure 138 select all the attributes for the pool Click CREATE STORAGE POOL to create the pool The SFA10000 will determine optimal enclosure disk selection to ensure minimized single points of failure In other words vertical striping across disk enclosures so that even the loss of an enclosure will not result in the loss of a storage pool Figure 138 Create Storage Pool Screen STORAGE POOLS CREATE STORAGE POOL 7 DISK WRITE READ g INDEX POOL CHUNK RAID lore FREE RAID TOTAL RAW me TIMEOUT SATAssure PHYSICAL VIRTUAL Back MIRRORED AHEAD ReACT NAME SIZE KB CAP GB CAP GB DISKS DISKS Min CACHE CACHE O pookO 128 RADS 21784 27360 21784 10 10 3 ri ri 1 poolt 256 RAIDS 2656 3168 2656 10 DIF 3 3 lt Eg 2 pook2 64 RADS 1248 2112 1248 10 DIF 6 3 zZ si d 3 pools 32 RAIDS 1248 1760 1248 10 DIF 5 3 3 4 4 pook4 256 RADS 3040 4000 3040 10 DIF 10 3 7 ri ri 5 pooks 32 RAIDS 1440 2400 1440 10 DIF 6 3 s x Select chunk size 32kb 64kb 128kb 256kb Not valid for RAID1 Select SATAssure C Data Integrity Field DIF Parity None Select Raid Level C RAID1 RAIDS 4d 1p RAIDS 8d 1p RAID6 4d 2p RAIDS Bd 2p How many Poolsto 13 create Select drive type DONT CARE E Select spindle Speed DONT CARE Select drive size DONT CARE E Allow IO during Ena
152. ays and Enclosures hereinafter DataDirect Networks Products Fibre Channel Interface Kits SCSI Interface Kits Host Adapters and Networking Products are limited to a 90 day warranty Software bundled or included with DataDirect Networks solutions are furnished exclusively under the terms of the applicable license agreements Warranty DataDirect Networks warrants that the DataDirect Networks Products accompanied by this limited Warranty are free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of two years from the date of original purchase from DataDirect Networks or an authorized DataDirect Networks reseller During the term of this Warranty DataDirect Networks will at its option repair or replace any defective parts of the DataDirect Networks products purchased under this Warranty at no additional charge Repair parts or replacement DataDirect Networks products will be furnished on an exchange basis and will be either reconditioned or new When returning the DataDirect Networks products the Purchaser must prepay any shipping charges In addition the Purchaser is responsible for insuring the products returned and assumes the risk of loss during shipment Warranty Claim Requirements Purchaser claims made pursuant to this Warranty must conform to the following requirements 1 The DataDirect Networks products must be returned to a an Authorized DataDirect Networks Servicing Reseller in the country of original purchase or b a Data
153. be MAC_OS APPLICATION CREATE HOST OSTYPE MAC OS Refer to Section 3 6 5 Additional Configuration Considerations for Mac Hosts for more information 2742 2 Selective Presentation By default a LUN is accessible via all initiators ports You may mask a presentation and choose the specific port on which the initiator may have access to the LUN You may mask a presentation when you create it APPLICATION SET PRESENTATION HOST lt host id gt VIRTUAL DISK lt vd id gt LUN lt LUN id gt ENABLE lt mask option gt By selecting the ENABLE option you are choosing the specific port on which the initiator may have access Controller 0 RPO ENABLE 0 Controller 0 RP1 ENABLE 1 Controller 1 RPO ENABLE 2 Controller 1 RP1 ENABLE 3 To mask a LUN to all ports use ENABLE ALL To change a mask you must first reset it with ENABLE NONE To mask a LUN to multiple ports you must set one port at a time For example to mask the same LUN 4 to Controller 0 RPO and Controller 1 RP1 APP SET PRESENTATION 4 ENABLE 0 APP SET PRESENTATION 4 ENABLE 3 2 7 13 Storage Pool Initialization When a storage pool is created initialization begins automatically and will continue in the background until it is completed Although a virtual disk can be accessed immediately the performance of the virtual disk will be degraded while it continues to initialize To monitor the progress of a job use the SHOW JOB ALL ATTRIBUTES command This command will di
154. ble SATAssure with the Parity Check on Read option see Section 3 3 3 for information Initialization Policy INITIALIZE_POLICY Select Allow_I0 to allow I O during initialization Select NO_IO to disallow I O during initialization Select DONT_CARE to use the default I O policy or current setting 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 61 Storage Pool Management To create a storage pool enter the command CREATE POOL RAID LEVEL 1 5 6 CHUNK SIZE 32 64 128 256 ASSIGN POLICY SAS SATA NUMBER 2 5 6 9 10 or PHYSICAL DISK lt list of disks gt SATASSURE NONE DATA_INTEGRITY_FIELD PARITY INITIALIZE POLICY ALLOW IO NO IO DONT CARE You may either explicitly select the disks for the pool by using PHYSICAL DISK or specify the number of disks in the pool by using NUMBER in which case the next available disks will be selected If you specify the ASSIGN POLICY and NUMBER parameters together only the selected type of disks will be used for the storage pool and you will not need to enter the individual disk name Examples e To use only the specified disks CREATE POOL RAID LEVEL RAID5 CHUNK_SIZE 64KB PHYSICAL DISK 62 63 64 65 66 e To use any available disks CREATE POOL RAID LEVEL RAID6 CHUNK_SIZE 128KB NUMBER 6 e To use only the selected type of disks CREATE POOL RAID LEVEL RAID6 CHUNK_SIZE 128KB NUMBER 6 ASSIGN_POLICY SAS 3 3 3 SATAssure You may enable SATAssure for a storag
155. bled Disabled vn initialization Set Priority allow 10 DONT CARE during initialization me ADVANCED OPTIONS CREATE STORAGE POOL DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 115 Storage Pools OPTIONAL You may explicitly select the disks to add to the pool using the ADVANCED OPTIONS At the Create Storage Pool Advanced screen Figure 139 select the disks to add to the pool to be created Otherwise click CANCEL to cancel or click BACK to return to the previous screen Figure 139 Select Disks for Storage Pool STORAGE POOLS CREATE STORAGE POOL ADVANCED CHUNK SIZE 64KB IN BLOCKS RAID LEVEL 5 4d 1p SATAssure None Enclosure 1 Drive Capacity DONT CARE Spindle Speed DONT CARE Drive type DONT CARE BACK CREATE STORAGE POOL CANCEL 4 6 3 Configure Storage Pool Attributes To change the attributes of a storage pool select Pools gt Set Storage Pool Attributes At the Set Attributes for Pool screen Figure 140 make the desired changes and click UPDATE to save them Figure 140 Set Storage Pool Attributes Screen STORAGE POOLS SET POOL ATTRIBUTES SET ATTRIBUTES sa WRITE READ FULL FRACTIONAL rd Inn POOL z INDEX POOL NAME RAD STATE TIMEOUT SATAssure BACK MIRRORED AHEAD ReACT REDUID puting PRIORITY VERIFY in CAHE CACHE ORI URING 96 en pool 0 RAID6 10 NONE z pool 1 RAIDS III qA ql a4 4 q q poo RAIDS
156. cal EMAIL AGENT in that all of their settable attribute values are shared Automatic emails will be sent as notification of a selected group of warning and error events that have occurred on the SFA10000 The recipient address is user configurable and only one address is permitted per system To set the email address enter the command Figure 111 UI SET EMAIL IP ADDRESS lt mail server ip address gt IP PORT lt incoming mail server port gt FROM lt email address gt TO lt email address gt SUBJECT text To show all the email address attributes use the UI SHOW EMAIL ALL command Figure 111 Figure 111 Email Setup Example Screen RAID 0 ui set email ip address 192 168 0 10 SNMP Agent set with STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 0 ui set email ip port 25 SNMP Agent set with STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 0 ui set email to jdoe ddn com SNMP Agent set with STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 0 ui set email subject DDN SFA10000 Event Notification SNMP Agent set with STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 0 ui show email P_ADDRESS 192 168 0 10 P_PORT 25 FROM jdoe ddn com TO jdoe ddn com SUBJECT DDN SFA10000 Event Notification 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 97 31252 31353 96 00259 001 Remote Management of SFA10000 SNMP Setup The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP monitors network attached devices for conditions tha
157. carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7 This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to keep intact all notices c You must license the entire work as a whole under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy This License will therefore apply along with any applicable section 7 additional terms to the whole of the work and all its parts regardless of how they are packaged This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it d If the work has interactive user interfaces each must display Appropriate Legal Notices however if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices your work need not make them do so A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium is called an aggregate if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation s users beyond what the individual works permit Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate 6 Conveying Non Source Forms You may convey a
158. city Figure 52 A message is displayed to indicate whether the virtual disk creation was successful DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 43 Configuring the SFA10000 Figure 52 CREATE VIRTUAL DISKS Example Screen RAID 0 create virtual disk pool 0 capacity 16 VIRTUAL DISK 0 OID 0x89ba000 creation STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 0 create virtual disk capacity 32 pool 0 VIRTUAL DISK 1 OID 0x89bb001 creation STATUS Success 0x0 2 Use the CREATE VIRTUAL DISK command to add more virtual disks as needed If you need to delete a virtual disk use the DELETE VIRTUAL_DISK lt virtual disk id gt command You may assign a name to a virtual disk SET VIRTUAL DISK lt virtual disk id gt NAME lt virtual disk name gt To view the list of configured virtual disks use the command SHOW VIRTUAL_DISK Figure 53 Figure 53 Show Virtual Disk Information Screen RAID 0 show virtual_disk Home Background Idx Name State Pool Raid Cap GB Settings Jobs Current Preferred Job 0 vd 0 0 READY 0 5 3632 W I O L 0 O L 0 INACTIVE 1 vd 1 1 READY 15 3632 W I O L 0 1 R 0 INACTIVE 2 vd 2 2 READY 2 5 3632 W I O L 0 O L 0 INACTIVE 3 vd 3 3 NOT RDY 3 5 5480 W I I O L 0 1 R 0 0x28000003 Total Virtual Disks 4 To display the detailed information of a virtual disk use the command SHOW VIRTUAL DISK lt id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES Figure 54 Figure 54 Show Virtual_Disk All_Attributes Exam
159. copy of a covered work you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy or from any part of it Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work You may place additional permissions on material added by you to a covered work for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission Notwithstanding any other provision of this License for material you add to a covered work you may if authorized by the copyright holders of that material supplement the terms of this License with terms a Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License or b Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it or c Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version or d Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material or e Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names trademarks or service marks or f Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material or modified versions of it with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient fo
160. covery in the event of a single disk loss in the storage pool In RAID 6 the capacity of two disks is reserved for parity allowing data recovery if either one or two disks are down in a Storage Pool For maximum data protection DataDirect Networks recommends the use of RAID 6 e Chunk Size CHUNK SIZE The chunk size in KiB blocks defines the amount of data written to a single disk before proceeding to the next disk in the Storage Pool NOTE RAID 1 is a two member RAID set where the data is mirrored on each disk There is no parity hence the chunk size is fixed Disk Count NUMBER A RAID 1 storage pool consists of 2 physical disks A RAID 5 storage pool may consist of 5 or 9 physical disks A RAID 6 storage pool may consist of 6 or 10 physical disks e Disk Selection PHYSICAL DISK Unless you specify the disks to use the SFA10000 will automatically determine optimal enclosure disk selection to ensure minimized single points of failure In other words vertical striping across disk enclosures so that even the loss of an enclosure will not result in the loss of a storage pool e Drive Type Rotation Rate Capacity ASSIGN_POLICY Drive types can be SAS or SATA Rotation rate can be 15000 RPM 10000 RPM 7200 RPM 5400 RPM or SSD For maximum performance select disks with the same characteristics e SATAssure SATASSURE Select DATA_INTEGRITY_FIELD to enable SATAssure with the Data Integrity Field option Select PARITY to ena
161. cted Failure Ind Locate Indicator Location Part number Serial number Firmware version Init string version FPGA version Total Expanders 10 0x50000001 8 OK TRUE OFF OFF DEM6 TCA 00300 01 A MXSCI00085LVDOA5 D02 011 D02 011 7 9 0x78000009 1 0x50000001 g OK TRUE OFF OFF DEM7 TCA 00300 01 A MXSCI00089HVD11A D02 011 D02 011 7 10 0x7800000a L 0x50000001 10 OK TRUE OFF OFF DEM8 TCA 00300 01 A MXSCI00089HVD12C D02 011 D02 011 7 Physical Disk Firmware Update Procedure There are two 2 parts to update the physical disk firmware 1 2 Linux Environment Firmware Upload Firmware Update Upload the physical disk firmware to the primary controller using either Linux Environment or Windows Use the CLUI command SHOW CONTROLLER to identify the primary controller The example below shows the user is currently logged into the primary controller KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKERK Ed Controller s i kkkkkxkxkxkxkkxkxkxkxkxkkkkxkxkkkkx xxk OID 0x38000000 Index OID 0x38000001 Index Total Controllers 2 Update the physical disk firmware using CLUI commands Obtain the firmware from DDN 1 2 The file is copied to the primary controller 0001 Name B REMOTE SECONDARY Use the secured copy program scp to transfer the file to the controller with the command scp lt firmware file name gt firmware lt ip address of primary controller gt
162. cted Failure Ind OFF Locate Indicator OFF Baseboard part numbmer USE13000098RB05D Firmware version 04 02 01 Disk Enclosure Firmware Version FPGA version 0008 ndex 2 Enclosure 0x50000002 Type DISK Logical ID 0x50001 210006000 Vendor ID DDN Product ID 557000 Revision 0402 Zones 2 lt j Zones Setting Zoning Configuration 1 Fault Indicator OFF Predicted Failure Ind OFF Locate Indicator OFF Baseboard part number USE13000098RBO5D Firmware version 04 02 01g Disk Enclosure Firmware Version FPGA version 0008 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 36 Configuring the SFA10000 Verify that both controllers and all the disk enclosures can be seen Figure 40 and contain consistent firmware versions NOTE If an enclosure is not reporting the firmware version or reporting an incorrect version of firmware you must contact DDN Technical Support to have this error corrected before proceeding with the configuration Verify that the disk enclosures are correctly zoned Figure 40 using the table below If the setting is incorrect on a SS6000 or SS7000 enclosure refer to Appendix E for instructions on changing the configuration If the setting is incorrect on a SS2460 enclosure then have a DDN field engineer correct it Zones 1 e Systems using ten 60 bay disk enclosures e Systems using twenty 60 bay disk enclosures e Systems using five SS2460 disk enclosures Zones 2
163. d to the UPS to be replaced Issue the CLUI command LOCATE UPS lt id gt The blue Identify LED on the corresponding controller should blink Note down the controller ID 2 Shut down the controller and UPS Enter command SHUTDOWN CONTROLLER lt id gt This will cause an orderly controller shut down which concludes by automatically turning off the UPS power 3 After the UPS has powered down disconnect the 3 power cables and USB cable from the UPS Figure 173 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 152 UPS Maintenance Figure 173 Cabling between UPS and Controller Controller AC Power Cable To PDU r E USB Cable 4 Remove the UPS from the rack Remove the 2 screws one on each side at the front that secure the UPS to the rack Figure 174 Then slide the UPS out from the rack Figure 174 Screws at Front of UPS 5 Install the new UPS into rack and use the 2 screws to secure it to the rack 6 Reconnect the 3 power cables and USB cable to the UPS Figure 173 7 Press and hold the Power button for 2 seconds to turn on the UPS Figure 175 Figure 175 UPS Front Panel Power OK LED Power Button Load Segment 1 LED 8 Verify that the Power OK LED tu
164. d00 poold EADY RAIDS 16 AD AO Pa Pi 1 ano pot READY RADS 48 AO A0 ff f 2 vd21 pom READY RAIDS 48 A1 A1 amp 3 fvd32 pook2 R RADS 48 B 0 B 0 F 7 4 k3 pools READY RAIDS 48 Bi1 Bi1 Z zZ 5 fvd54 pom READY RAIDS 48 AO AD P P 6 fres pos READY RADS 48 A1 A1 v 7 eas pool READY RADS 48 B 0 B 0 ff E UPDATE CANCEL 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 119 Virtual Disks Menu 4 7 4 Delete a Virtual Disk Ay When you delete a Virtual Disk you lose access to all data that was stored on that Virtual Disk Warning If you need to delete a virtual disk select Virtual Disk gt Delete Virtual Disk At the Delete Virtual Disk screen Figure 147 select the virtual disk that you want to delete Click DELETE VIRTUAL DISK to delete that VD or click CANCEL to cancel operation You will be prompted to confirm deletion Click OK to confirm NOTE Ifa presentation is configured for a virtual disk deleting the virtual disk will return an error You must first delete all the presentations configured on that virtual disk using the Delete Presentation function under the Presentation menu Figure 147 Delete Virtual Disk Screen VIRTUAL DISK DELETE VIRTUAL DISK INDEX SELECT VDNAME POOLNAME state RAID CAP GB PREFERRED HOME CURRENT HOME FUTURE HOME WRITE BACK CACHE MIRRORED 3 Vv vd 3_7 pool 7 RAIDS 24 AO AO 4 r vd 4_7 pool 7 uF RAIDS 16 AO AO 4 5 r vd 5 8 pool
165. discovered initiator 75 storage pool 66 initialization 64 unassigned pool 82 failed 64 pool installation 14 spare create 45 70 spare display 69 storage create 41 unassigned 56 installation planning 15 inter controller link 22 internal disk replace controller 161 power cycle controller 87 IO ports controller 10 power cycle disk drive 157 IP address set controller 96 power requirement 18 T O module replace 165 power supply controller 8 J replace controller 159 presentation 47 71 job priority set 90 MacOS 73 L masking 50 priority LED job set 90 controller 7 rebuild set 91 controller IO port 11 internal disk module R controller 9 UPS 12 loading floor 17 rack location 16 RAID processor controller 9 locate dwell time 82 105 ReACT 88 login 54 reboot controller 87 rebuild logout 54 97 log event 93 109 automatic set 85 fractional 85 NA full 85 manual initialize 86 Manual Intervention Required 132 partial 85 mark event log 95 set priority 91 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 197 96 00259 001 repair how to return product for 199 replace disk manual 86 restart controller 87 subsystem 87 right side I O 89 RMA obtaining 199 RS 232 interface set up 53 RS 232 terminal set up 53 sS sales contacting 199 SAS cable replace 167 SATA disk power cycle 157 SATAssure 62 SCSI persistent reservation 73 serial port set up 53 service clearance 16
166. dition 0x0000 NO FAULT 0x0001 BATTERY TEMPERATURE 0x0002 CELL DETERIORATION 0x0004 SMBUS COMMUNICATION 0x0008 CHARGE FET CONTROL 0x0010 DISCHARGE FET CONTROL 0x0020 BATTERY VOLTAGE READING 0x0040 LOW CAPACITY w warning fault value non zero values indicate warning fault condition 0x0000 NO FAULT 0x0001 BATTERY TEMPERATURE 0x0002 CELL DETERIORATION Battery Yes Controller i in Battery Back Up State with Remaining Capacity x and backup state Holdup Time y minutes where e i controller ID xX remaining capacity value in e y estimated hold up time in minutes Log event message every second Battery End Yes Controller i Battery End of Life Warning of Life status where e i controller ID Log event message generated every 24 hour period 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 147 UPS Maintenance Table 7 UPS Battery Even t Log Messages Email Event Notification Log Message Format Battery No Controller i Time t sec Mode m Charger x mV y mA Ibatt c mA charging where update i controller ID status t charge time in seconds m charge mode where 1 Normal and 2 Degraded x charge voltage in mV e y charge current in mA e c battery current in mA Discharge No Controller i Battery discharge circuit ACTIVE circuit status Controller i Battery discharge circuit DEACTIVATED where i controller ID Battery fatal Yes C
167. dle is released by pressing the handle release button Each disk module has 2 LEDs one green and one blue Flashing green indicates disk activity while solid green indicates that the disk is online but idle When the SFA OS starts it lights all 3 blue LEDs for 4 seconds During discovery and while in a MIR Manual Intervention Required state the blue LEDs alternately blink from right to left Under normal conditions the blue LEDs alternately blink from left to right If all of the blue LEDs are off then the SFA OS is not completely running Common failures will result in either a single blue LED being illuminated or all the blue LEDs being off Figure 9 Controller Internal Disk Module Handle Release Button Lock Handle 125 RAID Processor and Application Processor The two redundant and hot swappable controllers provide the intelligence and active active data protection features of the SFA10000 If a controller fails the remaining controller will assume its functionality and continue to provide data access at a reduced performance level The SFA10000 has two parallel multi threaded RAID engines that work simultaneously in each controller for a total of 4 RAID Processors across the redundant controller pair The SFA10000E has a single parallel multi threaded RAID engine in each controller for a total of 2 RAID Processors across the redundant controller pair In addition to the RAID Processor each SFA
168. dule must be installed in every slot of the enclosure in order to maintain proper airflow and cooling 5 For system using SS6000 or SS7000 disk enclosures After you have installed all the disk modules in this enclosure close the enclosure covers and engage both cover latches Squeeze the tabs on both rack slides and push the enclosure back into the rack 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 21 Cable Connections 2 5 Cable Connections 25 1 Couplet ICL Cabling There are two sets of Inter Controller Link ICL connections between the two controllers 1 Verify that the two InfiniBand cables are attached to the ICL ports on the two controllers as shown in Figure 23 for SFA10000 and Figure 24 for SFA10000E 2 Verify that the four short Ethernet cables are attached to the Ethernet ports on the two controllers as shown in Figure 23 for SFA10000 and Figure 24 for SFA10000E Figure 23 Inter Controller Link Connections on SFA10000 Controllers Controller 0 InfiniBand Cable Ethernet Cable Figure 24 Inter Controller Link Connections on SFA10000E Controllers
169. e 4 The SFA10000 System Hardware 1 2 The SFA10000 System Hardware This section describes the hardware components of the SFA10000 controller Refer to DDN SS6000 User Guide DDN SS7000 User Guide and DDN SS2460 User Guide for hardware descriptions on the SS6000 SS7000 and SS2460 disk enclosures The SFA10000 controller is a three unit 3U rack mountable enclosure Figure 2 Figure 2 SFA10000 Controller Chassis At the front there are four fan modules three internal disk modules control buttons and status LED indicators Figure 3 Figure 3 SFA10000 Controller Front View without Bezel Internal Disk Internal Disk Internal Disk Disk A J Disk B Disk C DataDirect NETWORKS I SFA10000 DISKA DISKB mem
170. e Pools Storage pools can be configured to use either a RAID 1 RAID 5 or RAID 6 parity scheme In RAID 1 the capacity of one disk is used for data duplication In RAID 5 the capacity of one disk is reserved for parity allowing data recovery in the event of asingle disk loss in the storage pool In RAID 6 the capacity of two disks is reserved for parity allowing data recovery if either one or two disks are down in a storage pool For maximum data protection DataDirect Networks recommends the use of RAID 6 e Chunk Size The chunk size in KiB blocks defines the amount of data written to a single disk before proceeding to the next disk in the storage pool NOTE RAID1 is a two member RAID set where the data is mirrored on each disk There is no parity hence the chunk size is fixed e Disk Count A RAID 1 storage pool may consists of 2 physical disks A RAID5 storage pool may consist of 5 or 9 physical disks A RAID6 storage pool may consist of 6 or 10 physical disks For maximum performance select disks with the same characteristics such as SAS SATA capacity and RPM e Drive Type Drive types can be SAS or SATA e Drive Size Drive size is the capacity of the disk e Spindle Speed You may choose RPM 15000 10000 7200 5400 0 or SSD e SATAssure SATAssure technology is designed by DDN to improve the reliability of enterprise SATA disks and make sure that data integrity is always mentioned for all I O oper
171. e Storage Pools Locate Spare Pools Locate Storage Pools Locate Unassigned Pool Move Pool Set Spare Pool Attributes Set Spare Pool Drive Assign Policy Set Storage Pool Attributes Show Spare Pools Show Storage Pools Show Unassigned Pool verify Pools Storage Pools Storage pool commands are located under the Pools pull down menu Figure 136 Show List of Storage Pools To display the list of existing storage pools select Pools gt Show Storage Pools The list of storage pools is displayed Figure 137 Click on the individual storage pool name to display its detailed information Figure 137 Storage Pool List STORAGE POOLS SHOW ALL POOLS CHUNK FREE E size kB RAD GB 64 pool 64 POOL OID Ox1db50010 Name Type Chunk Size Block Size Raidset type Free Raid Capacity Total Raw Capacity STATE RAID CAP ae we TIMEOUT SATAssure PNG VETA ae MIRRORED HER ReACT GB GB Min CACHE CACHE 18240 0 10 DIF 10 1 s v 18240 0 10 DIF 10 1 4 N v v 18240 0 10 DIF 10 1 N vA N 15416 0 10 DIF 9 1 J N 18240 0 10 DIF 10 1 s v N N 18240 0 10 DIF 10 1 v v J v pool 16 STORAGE 64KB 512 bytes RAID6 0 GB 18240 GB vi DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 114 4 6 2 96 00259 001 Create a Storage Pool A storage pool on a SFA10000 has the following attributes e RAID Level Storag
172. e Update KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK KK Controller s x KKK KK KKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK OID 0x38000000 Index 0000 Name A LOCAL PRIMARY OID 0x38000001 Index 0001 Name B REMOTE SECONDARY Total Controllers 2 2 Update Disk Shelf using CLUI commands 5 4 3 2 Linux Environment Firmware Upload Obtain the firmware from DDN Firmware must be running on the controller and must be connected to the enclosure to be upgraded 1 Use the secured copy program scp to transfer the file to the expander with the command scp lt firmware file name gt firmware lt ip address of primary controller gt To determine the file to upload refer to Section 5 4 3 1 Enclosure File Definitions NOTE Ensure the colon is at the end of the above command 2 Enter the password Firmware Note that entries are case sensitive The file will be copied to the primary controller 5 4 3 3 Windows Environment Firmware Upload Obtain the firmware from DDN Firmware must be running on the controller and must be connected to the enclosure to be upgraded 1 Use the putty secured copy program pscp to transfer the file to the expander with the command pscp lt firmware file name gt firmware lt ip address of primary controller gt NOTE Ensure the colon is at the end of the above command 2 Enter the password Firmware Note that entries are case sensitive The file will be copied to the primary
173. e cece ene cen n ener e eee en een ee enenes 156 5 6 5 Power Cycling SATA Disk Drives cece e cence cence eee e eee en eens 157 57 Controller Component Failures nesnenin notion a a ahs 158 5 7 1 Replacing a Power Supply Module cece cece eee eee en ee eenees 159 57 2 Replacing a Fan Module cece eee ence eect eee e eee e ne eneaneaes 160 57 3 Replacing an Internal Disk Module ce cece cence eee eee e ees 161 5 74 Replacing aController 0 cece cece e cence drist eee e ne eneeneaes 162 5 8 Disk Enclosure Component Failures 0 00 cece cece cece eee e eee eeeeeeeeees 165 5 8 1 I O Module Replacement 0 ccc e cece e cece eee e eens nent eenens 165 58 2 DEM Replacement on SS6000 0 cece cece eee cece eee teen ee ee ence 166 58 3 SAS Cable Replacement 0 cece cece cee e cece eee ence ene ence ene 167 5 8 4 SS7000 Enclosure Replacement Procedure e cece cece eee eens 168 Appendices Appendix A Technical Specifications cece cece cece eect eet eeeeeeeenees 170 Appendix Bi FRU Part NUMBERS sursserdyddsen dad ca natecamodeteeeaeledegedeenees 173 Appendix C Disk Module Installation ccc cece cece cece eect ee eeeeeeennes 175 C 1 S56000 Disk Module Installation Procedure r vvananenennananenenene 175 C2 SS7000 Disk Module Installation Procedure 0 cece eee eee ee ees 176 C3 SS2460 Disk Module In
174. e front of the rail to the rack Figure 209 Figure 209 Secure Front of Rail to Rack Use Only 1 Screw at Bottom to Secure the Front 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 187 Rack Installation Procedure 5 Use two screws to secure the rear end of the rail to the rack Figure 210 Figure 210 Secure Rear End of Rail to Rack Use 2 Screws to Secure the Rear End 6 Slide the UPS onto the rack rails Then use one screw on each side to secure the mounting brackets to the rack Figure 211 Figure 211 Secure UPS to Rack Use Screw Here 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 188 Temperature Sensor Locations This appendix provides information on the temperature sensors located in the controllers and disk enclosures G 1 SFA10000 Controller The SHOW TEMP command will display the status information of the temperature sensors RAID 1 show temp KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK ial Temperature Sensor s w KKKKKKKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KK KK Over Temp Indicators Idx Encl Pos Temp C Present Warning Failure Failure Locate Location SES Status 1 0 1 43 TRUE FALSE FALSE OFF OFF CPUO O 2 0 2 32 TRUE FALSE FALSE OFF OFF CPU1 O 3 0 3 48 TRUE FALSE FALSE OFF OFF VRDO O Sensors 4 0 4 50 TRUE FALSE FALSE OFF OFF VRD1 O inside 5 0 5 26 TRUE FALSE FALSE OFF OFF InletM O 6 0 6 21 TRUE FALSE FALSE OFF OFF Controller 7
175. e pool at any time SATAssure technology is designed by DDN to improve the reliability of enterprise SATA disks and make sure that data integrity is always mentioned for all I O operations There are two options available Parity Check on Read PCOR and Data Integrity Field DIF PCOR uses RAID parity to detect and correct physical disk errors If PCOR is enabled for a given storage pool RAID parity will be checked on all reads The size and type of I O operations will have an effect on system performance when this option is enabled The DIF option may be applied to RAID 5 and RAID 6 storage pools only DIF stores a data integrity field similar to a CRC checksum This option uses far less system resources than the PCOR option and is minimally intrusive on the SFA10000 s performance When a storage pool is created with SATAssure DIF enabled the DIF blocks on media containing the expected block CRC and tag values will be initialized If DIF is enabled on a previously initialized pool then a non destructive initialization will be initiated for the pool which will leave the data and parity intact while initializing the DIF fields The initialization is transparent and data is available during the initialization process Although reformatting of the storage pools is not required it is recommended that you back up all data prior to using the DIF initialization utility To display the current setting enter the command Figure 7
176. e specified controller The SHUTDOWN SUBSYSTEM RESTART command performs a restart on both controllers 3102 Shut Down Power Cycle If you need to power cycle the SFA10000 system or one of the controllers the SFA OS must be shut down prior to shutting off the power This will cause the SFA10000 to immediately flush its cache abort all initialization and rebuild operations and proceed with an orderly shut down 310 21 Power Cycling One Controller The SHUTDOWN CONTROLLER LOCAL REMOTE 0 1 command shuts down the specified controller If you need to power cycle both controllers see Section 3 10 2 2 Power Cycling Both Controllers 31022 Power Cycling Both Controllers NOTE You must use the SHUTDOWN SUBSYSTEM command to shut down BOTH controllers at the same time if you need to power cycle the entire SFA10000 system This will ensure both controllers are properly shut down and will boot up correctly If you need to power cycle the entire system make sure all hosts actively using the SFA10000 are safely shut down and all users logged out Then issue the command SHUTDOWN SUBSYSTEM to shut down both controllers Note that this command only shuts down the controllers The disk enclosures will remain on The SFA10000 will halt all I O requests and save the data to the disks The two controllers can be safely turned off after using this command Once shut down is complete all power supplies must be switched off or unplugged
177. e virtual disk will show to the host NOTE When there are no presentations mapping to LUN 0 for a host SFA OS will present a controller LUN processor a LUN 0 of SCSI peripheral device type 03h 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 125 Presentations 4 9 1 Presentation Menu Figure 156 shows the Presentation pull down menu Figure 156 Presentation Menu Presentation Create Initiator Create Presentation Delete Host i Delete Initiator i Delete Presentation Import Initiator Set Application Channel Attributes Set Host Attributes Set Presentation Attributes Set Stack Attributes Show Application Channels Show Hosts Show Initiators Show Presentations Show Stack 4 9 2 Show Presentations To display the list of configured presentations Figure 157 select Presentation gt Show Presentations Figure 157 Show Presentations Screen PRESENTATION SHOW PRESENTATIONS INDEX pogr MRTUAL LUN READ PRESENT Port Port Por Por3 Pod Pott Pon2 Pon3 Pod Pott Potz Pon3 Pond Pott Por2 Por DISK ONLY HOMEONLY CORPO CORPO CORPO CORPO CORPI CORP CORPI CORP1 C1RPO C1RPO CIRPO CIRPO CIRP1 C1RP1 CIRP1 CIRP1 O mto wt 0 NE N ee GE E NE O O AO NENEN kote di 1 10 FF fee eC Ee SF e 4 9 3 Set Up a Presentation 4 9 3 1 Create a Host 1 Select Presentation gt Create Host 2
178. ece Deaan ALA cette eene ete e eee eeenaeeteeeeeeeeaaes xiii Canadian Regulations ccc cece cece ene rrd A akaka ENARE EERI ENEE xiii Sate Handling sessio rors enaar EO EEEE SEE TANE ERR E EERE xiii Safety use bee AAR EEE E TEE ETERA xiii Recycling of Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE 55 xiv ESD Precautions eenn esas aves E r E E TEO E ees teten xiv Data SECUrity ierit nE EE AAE E A DEE NE a E E XV Chapter 1 Introduction 1 ftrodust h iurasessdsessdasalkerrdaaurdkesenale EER 2 1 1 1 DataDirect Networks Storage Fusion Architecture SFA asananannen 2 11 2 Product Variations isc catstccsathaawenkiegeeeed E 2 1 1 3 Features of the SFA10000 cece eee cece e ence e een ence ee eneeneas 3 1 2 The SFA10000 System Hardware cee eccece eee e eee ee eect eeteeenaaeeeeeees 5 1 2 1 Status LED Indicatorsusesss jucdnsesker vader ea eia vee tardeay edad aa dad one 7 122 Fam MOU ists csc cess cay na gamete is nere banene 8 1 23 Power Supply Module 0 cece cece cece eee eee een ence ene eenees 8 1 24 Internal Disk Modules 0 cece cece cece ence ence ene eeeenans 9 1 2 5 RAID Processor and Application Processor 0 cece cece eee ee eee eens 9 1 26 1 VOR rasere eee 10 1 2 7 Uninterruptible Power Supplies UPS rarananananmanenenenennenener 12 Chapter 2 Installation 21 instalation OVenview weiss ssccciace fea donee s de ees sad daa m
179. ecify a version number of the GNU General Public License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used that proxy s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions However no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version 15 Disclaimer of Warranty THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 16 Limitation of Liability IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OU
180. ed Disks 98 Total SAS Disks 300 Total Member State Normal 22 Physical Disk Information To display the list of unassigned disks enter the command SHOW UNASSIGNED POOL PHYSICAL DISK To retrieve information about a specific disk enter the command SHOW PHYSICAL DISK lt disk id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES Figure 73 Figure 73 Physical Disk Information Example Screen Kokk Physical Disk s kr skr skr skr skr skr r ee Index 852 OID 0x20770354 Pool Index UNASSIGNED Pool OID UNASSIGNED Capacity 536 GB Raw Capacity 558 GB Base 2 600 GB Base 10 Block Size 512 Available Channels 02 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 14 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 22 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 36 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA Enabled Path IDs Enclosure Index 0x174 0x20d0 0x218 0x2218 1 Enclosure OID 0x50000001 Disk Slot 1 131 Vendor ID HITACHI Product ID HUS156060VLS600 Product Revision ASDO Serial Number JWV3LUPE Health State GOOD Rotation Speed 15000 RPM Device Type SAS Member State UNASSIGNED State READY Spare FALSE Failed FALSE Quorum FALSE UUID 0x5000cca00 068f2c Interposer Type NONE Update in Progress FALSE If there is a failed disk use the SHOW UNASSIGNED POOL FAILED ALL command to display the failed disk s information Figure 74 Figure 74 Show Failed Disk Example Screen TR RR RK KR OK Physical Disk s KKKKKKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK Index 39 OID 0x2135008b Pool I
181. ee e eee eee nes 96 3 13 3 Change Network Interface Settings cece eee eee een eee eenes 96 3 134 LOGINS ayrs pdsurbernetardaee dere fr Schon duel wits ely tha dubly Wie ele EREA viet 97 3 13 5 Email and SNMP Notification Setup 0 cece cece eee cece eee eens 97 3 13 5 1 Email Setup oeeie a cece cece cece cece eee e eee e eee eeeeeeeneees 97 31352 SNMP Setup eisernen ana teed E E AT ETRE A NRO sert 98 3 13 5 3 Inquiry Items and Events 0c cee eee ence e eee ee eeeeeeeeeeneenaaes 98 Chapter 4 GUI Management 4 1 Starting the GUI Management Agent cece ee eeee eee eet eenneeeeeeeenes 102 Agent BAN WC EE EEE EE ER 102 4 1 2 Home Screen and Health Indicators cece cece e eee eee eee aes 103 42 Subsystem MON ciccccci iia tecactee vue nana a sete E EEEN EEEIEE EESAN EAEE 104 4 2 1 Show Subsystem anuvnunnanuenuenunnennenuenunnennennennanenneneene 104 42 2 Set Subsystem Attributes 0 eee eee eee eee nen eaes 105 4 2 2 1 NTP Settings isrsnd amped aber I ETETE ENARE ERAR 105 4 2 2 2 Locate TIME wo cients i ranns E EEIE EAS TE eden 105 42 3 Show Background JobS eee e eee int inr EE EEE EEEa 106 42 4 Set Background Jobs Attributes eee eee n eee eee aes 106 42 5 Email and Critical Event Notification Setup 0 cece cence eee eens 106 4 3 Controllers Menu pestdusaesnnidesinersnsedevnnnidnibvetd 108 4 3 1 Show Controllers aannnannannvnnnnenn
182. ee eee e eee eeees 140 5 4 3 3 Windows Environment Firmware Upload 00eeeeeeeeeeneeeeee 140 5 4 3 4 Disk Shelf Upgrade ccc terreri tirit teense eee e ett E E EEVEE EEN 140 544 Physical Disk Firmware Update Procedure 0 cece cence eee ees 143 5 4 4 1 Linux Environment Firmware Upload ccccceee cece ee eeeees 143 5 4 4 2 Windows Environment Firmware Upload 000eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 144 5 4 4 3 Physical Disk Upgrade ec eceeeee eee e enn e eee eee eenneeeee eee nes 144 59 UPSMENteNENEE oeeie ann aa ote hes pa enean eGo cece Guan 146 5 5 1 UPS and Battery Pack Care aaannannnnennvnnennnnennennennnnennennen 146 55 2 Checking the UPS Status 0 cece cee cece eee ence nent ene aneaes 146 553 Endof Life Warning cece cece cece eee e eee n ene UNENE NNAS 149 5 5 4 Replacing the Battery Pack cee cece cence eee eee e nee eneenenes 150 5 5 4 1 Testing Batterie Seerias r hes ra E AAEN EAEAN wis 152 555 Replacing the UPS Unit 0 cece tdrt stanku DEEN AEE NEARNE 152 56 RecoveryfromDiskF llure ur us einserisvereeer vn rctauvenesevabveaeewenvupa ts 155 5 6 1 Automatic Rebuild savanenennananenenennanenenenenennanenenenenene 155 5 6 2 Spare Disk Replacement arenunnananenenennanenenenennanenenenener 156 56 3 When a Spare is not available ccc cece cece eee ene e eee eens 156 5 6 4 Manual Rebuild 00 cec
183. eer eas 14 22 Site Pre Paravlonsavsincnchasy any cave tessaae sacdeve sane asepadonseenbawoadowenuage aces 15 2 2 1 Delivery Route Verification 0 cece cece eee e cence tenn en eee eenens 15 2 2 2 Rack Location Air Flow and Access 0c ccc ccc cece cece eee eee e ee eenas 16 223 Floor LOAadiNG wccec sis ee tea ridind ee Eas N rarna SAAE Wes Vendo ves kartene 17 2 24 Cooling Supply Planning 0 cece eee ence nent n eee e enn enes 17 2 2 5 AC Power Supply Planning and Verification 0 cece eee eee eee 18 23 Unpacking the SFA IOO0O Lun senare dead 20 2 3 1 Packing List eenias oie Anen E E eden eda 20 24 Installing the Disk Modules use ds seder ska ermal Maan dedaaae kane 21 25 Table GOnMECUONS uorganiske 22 2 5 1 Couplet ICL Cabling uvvgs asset 22 25 2 Disk Enclosure Cabling 0 cece eee ier iin rE ENEA EnaA 23 2 5 3 HOStCONNECHONS sc cdsreceeatavasraaataweiuwal A 30 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide xvi Table of Contents 2 5 3 1 SFA T0000 piperno identan e a ade cendidduwsedscutaie dean EEE EE 30 2 5 3 2 SFATODOOE era etal a a S E E EE 30 254 Management Network Connection cece eee eee e eee eee eeenes 31 2 5 5 RS 232 Console Connection 0 cece cece cece eee eee eee eeeeeeeee 31 256 UPS Connection acie nerenin eske verner ke Hew bead aes Va eae 32 2 5 6 1 UPS B tt ry ups seeks 32 2 5 7 Power Connections e asavnnu
184. ement A virtual disk is the storage unit presented to any attached host A virtual disk can be created to use all or just a part of the capacity of a single storage pool Virtual disks allocate space in 8 GiB increments For example 16 GiB of storage space will be allocated when creating a virtual disk of 10 GiB 3 4 1 Display Virtual Disk Information The SHOW VIRTUAL_DISK command displays the list of configured virtual disks in the system Figure 81 Figure 81 Show Configured Virtual Disks Example Screen RAID 0 show vd Home Background Idx Name State Pool Raid Cap GB Settings Jobs Current Preferred Job 0 vd 0 0 READY 0 5 3632 W T O L 0 O L 0 INACTIVE 1 vd 1 1 READY 1 5 3632 W I O L 0 1 R 0 INACTIVE 2 vd 22 READY 2 5 3632 W I O L 0 O L 0 INACTIVE 3 vd 33 READY 3 5 5480 W I O L 0 1 R 0 INACTIVE 4 vd 474 READY 4 5 5480 W I O L 0 O L 0 INACTIVE 6 vd 6_5 READY 5 5 5480 W I O L 0 1 R 0 INACTIVE Total Virtual Disks 6 The State field shows the current state of the virtual disk e AWL The VD is auto write locked due to an error that prevents dirty data from being flushed e CRITICL The VD is in a critical condition due to multiple failures that exceed designed fault tolerance e INOP The VD is inoperative due to pool degradation e NOT RDY The VD is not ready for I O operations e READY The VD is ready for I O operations e WR THRU The VD is ready but in forced write thru mode d
185. en SAS link LEDs on an I O module IOM is not lit 2 Identify the IOM that is associated with the failing cable This is done by physically following the cable to an IOM 3 Identify the physical controller associated with this IOM Follow the cable connected to this IOM back to the associated SFA controller Each of the cables is labeled with a 3 digit number that has the form 0xx or 1xx All of the cables with labels beginning with 0 go to one controller and all of those beginning with 1 go to the other controller In cases where more than one SFA10000 is installed in a set of racks each couplet reuses the same cable labels so be careful not to confuse couplets 4 Determine the index of the associated controller Use the LOCATE CONTROLLER lt id gt command to flash the blue Locate LED on the front panel 5 Shut down the associated controller Enter the SHUTDOWN CONTROLLER lt id gt command where lt id gt is the index of the controller which was determined in Step 4 This will cause all pools to fail over to the other controller 6 Physically replace the failing cable 7 Restart the controller that was shut down Press the Power button on the controller s UPS Allow the controller to start Eventually the pools will fail back to the controller that was shut down OOOO 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 167 Disk Enclosure Component Failures 5 8 4 SS7000 Enclosure Replacement Procedu
186. ensors list of temperature sensors For each sensor ID Enclosure ID Enclosure position Status normal warning critical Fans Number of fans in the system list of fans For each fan ID Enclosure ID Enclosure position Status healthy failure Power Supplies Number of power supplies in the system list of power supplies For each power supply ID Enclosure ID Enclosure position Status healthy failure Pools Number of pools list of pools For each pool OID type storage spare unassigned access number of members Physical Disks List of disks for each disk WWN enclosure number slot status normal failed predicted failure unknown DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 98 96 00259 001 Table 5 SNMP Only Events Remote Management of SFA10000 SNMP ONLY Events Error Description LOG_AMPD_DEVICE_INIT_FAILED A device failed to initialize LOG_AMPD_DSK_DEVICE_INIT_FAILED DISK device initialization failure LOG_AMPD_ICL_DEVICE_INIT_FAILED ICL device initialization failure LOG_AMPD_MPI_DSK_SCSI_SENSE_DATA Disk data received LOG AMPD MPI ICL SCSI SENSE DATA ICL SCSI sense data was received LOG AMPD MPI SCSI SENSE DATA EVT SCSI sense data was received LOG AMPD MPI SES SCSI SENSE DATA SES SCSI sense data was received LOG AMPD SES DEVICE INIT FAILED SES device initializa
187. enuenunnennenuennnnuanenuene 108 43 2 Set Controller Attributes cece ccc eee eee e eee e een eeneaes 108 4 3 3 Update Controller Firmware ccc cece cece n nen eee een eneeees 109 434 View System Logs sss niaeeksscastiawenraeieers anesthe ces ta esede 109 J Physical Disks MENU wis 6ui va naaccloaheeh kanana NEDENARNE EREE nna ean 110 44 1 Show List of Physical DiskS 00 cece cence eee cette eee ence ences 110 442 Locate Disks Lina tiene ear pare De 111 4 4 3 Remove Disk from Spare Pool awanananennananenenennnnenenenenennenr 111 44 4 Assign Disks to POOl cece eee cece eee e ene nee n een een ea eenenes 111 AS Unassigned POG vsxaucecevis correr nirna ied eeee desea Geek ews Saw a ie UNA 112 4 5 1 Show Unassigned Pool 0 cece eee eee eect eee e een een eeneneenees 112 45 2 Locate Unassigned Pool cece cece eee nen eee nhi kekiri ri 113 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide xix Table of Contents 26 Storage Podlsu ie ccd cornsteaneeheveunas EE RAER R REENA 114 46 1 Show List of Storage Pools 0 cece cece eee eee eect teen eee ee eenees 114 46 2 Create a Storage Pool cece cece cece ee een cent EENE UNES 115 46 3 Configure Storage Pool Attributes 0 eee eee eee eee e ees 116 46 4 Locate Storage Pools ieee cece cece ene en eee een eee e ne eneans 117 46 5 Delete a Storage Pool cece cece cece eee te
188. es The SFA10000E disk modules have been pre labeled with a slot number Use the charts in Appendix D to determine proper drive placement according to the slot number on the label For SFA10000 configurations create a more balanced load by evenly distributing the disk modules among the disk enclosures If a mixture of disk technologies such as SAS and SATA will be populated into the enclosures it is best to populate the SAS disks into the front slots and install the SATA disks in the rear slots When handling the disk modules and components avoid contact with backplane components and module connectors Electrostatic discharge Warning can damage the circuit boards Follow these steps to install a disk module NOTE Also refer to Appendix C if you need detailed instructions for disk module installation 1 For system using SS6000 or SS7000 disk enclosures Slide the enclosure out from the rack by squeezing the tabs on both rack slides Keep pulling until the enclosure locks and you hear a clicking sound Open the enclosure covers 2 Release the handle on the disk module 3 Insert the module into a disk bay Cam the disk module home The camming foot on the base of the module will engage into the slot in the enclosure 4 When the module is fully inserted close the handle You should hear a click as the latch engages and holds the handle closed NOTE On the 552460 enclosures a disk module or a dummy disk mo
189. es special cabling that can be purchased separately from DDN See your sales contact for more details Active Active Operation with Cache Coherency and Failover SFA implements an active active host presentation model with routing based data access and full cache coherency Data Protection The SFA RAID stack provides protection against single physical disk failures with RAID 1 or RAID 5 data protection as well as double physical disk failures through the use of high speed RAID 6 protection Configurable RAID Group Sizes 5 or 9 disks RAID 5 group 6 or 10 disks RAID 6 group 2 disks RAID 1 group This feature allows you to configure the system with the desired RAID and redundancy levels based on data requirements Each RAID group is configured independently and any valid combination for the number of disks in the array is supported SAS SATA SSD storage pool Intermixing high performance SSD and SAS disks with high capacity SATA disks provides the flexibility to migrate disk technology along with varying application needs The SFA10000 s enclosure level disk intermixing and exceptional per disk performance reduces the number of disks needed to meet growing performance and capacity demands lowering both acquisition and operation costs e SATAssure Data Protection SATAssure technology Silent Data Corruption Detection and Avoidance is designed by DDN to improve the reliability of enterprise SATA disks and make sure that data integrity
190. etains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product for example the work has been installed in ROM The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service warranty or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network Corresponding Source conveyed and Installation Information provided in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented and with an implementation available to the public in source code form and must require no special password or key for unpacking reading or copying 7 Additional Terms Additional permissions are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License to the extent that they are valid under applicable law If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program that part may be used separately under those permissions but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions When you convey a
191. f racks that are side by side where each rack draws cool air from a 60 1524 mm walking aisle and blows hot air into a 48 1220 mm maintenance aisle Figure 19 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 16 Site Preparation Figure 19 Rows of Racks with Cold Air Aisles and Hot Air Aisles Side View Perforated Ceiling Warm Air Return Perforated Tiles Raised Floor Perforated Tiles 2 23 Floor Loading The SFA10000 racks are heavy and it is important to verify that the weight does not exceed the floor specifications DDN will provide an estimate of the weight of each rack on request A full 45U SFA 10000 rack with ten 60 bay disk enclosures can weigh up to 2570 lbs 1166 kg This weight is relatively evenly distributed across the four castors and or leveling feet so each will be subject to a load of 645 Ibs While the load from such a rack is 289 Ib ft 2570 Ib 8 9ft underneath the rack the average load is less given the space for isles With the minimum size isles 48 in the front and 30 in the back the load is 156 Ib ft 289 lb ft x 45 75 45 75 48 2 30 2 The more common 42U SFA10000 racks for 5 and 10 disk enclosure subsystems weigh approximately 1600 lbs and so the point load is only 400 Ibs and the floor loading is 180 Ib ft 1600 Ib 8 9113 Accounting for the minimum isle space the load is 98 Ib ft To Do List I Verify with the building structural engi
192. ge pool is being initialized see Section 3 3 1 Display Storage Pool Information for more information You may monitor the initialization progress using the SHOW JOB command see Section 3 11 4 Background Job Priority for more information CR Initialization Job Failure Rarely a job may fail to initialize If so the event will be reported as 000737 2010 01 25 20 42 09 0684480 G 61 S 2 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG ST SET FAILED STATE VIRTUAL DISK SET FAILED CONDITION INDEX 00000003 POOL 00000000 INIT FAILED If an initialization job fails enter the command VERIFY POOL lt pool id gt FORCE to restart the initialization Examples e SHOW POOL command under failed initialization conditions Total Free Max Disk Global Spare Idx Name State Chunk Raid Faults cap GB cap GB VD GB Settings Jobs T O spare pool Policy 0 pool 0 FAILED 128 6 I 720 0 0 DWMRFI 1 UNASSIGNED AUTO 1 pool 1 NORMAL 128 6 720 0 0 DWMRFI 1 UNASSIGNED AUTO e SHOW POOL 0 ALL command under failed initialization conditions Index 0 OID 0x1a520000 Type STORAGE Name pool 0 Chunk Size 128KB 0x100 blocks Block Size 512 RAID Type RAID6 Free Raid6 Capacity 0 GB Max VD Size 0 GB Total Capacity 720 GB UUID 60001 0800a3000000000001a520000 Global Spare Pool UNASSIGNED DiskTimeout FRT 1 minute Init Policy ALLOW IO Initializing FAILED Rebuilding FALSE Paused FALSE e SHOW VD command under failed initialization condi
193. he battery manufacturing date and life remaining are not available as shown below proceed to Step c Battery Mfg Date NOT AVAILABLE Battery Life Remaining NOT AVAILABLE c Issue the command CLEAR CONTROLLER LOCAL UPS_HISTORY Then issue the command SHOW UPS ALL and you should see output similar to the following Battery Mfg Date Thu Sep 8 4 10 30 2011 Battery Life Remaining 730 days only be used after receiving a new backup battery or controller Entering this command at any other time will inadvertently extend the life cycle of a bad unknown battery The CLEAR CONTROLLER UPS HISTORY command should Warning 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 138 Firmware Update 5 4 3 Disk Enclosure Firmware Update Procedure NOTE This is an offline upgrade Any application host should be shut down or quiesced prior to performing this operation Known Issues When upgrading the enclosure firmware any errors experienced while downloading the firmware will not be realized until the operation is complete and the shelf is power cycled At that time any errors are displayed and it may be necessary to attempt the upgrade a second time It is required that you shut down one controller prior to upgrading the enclosure firmware Use the CLUI command SHUTDOWN CONTROLLER REMOTE 5 4 3 1 Enclosure File Definitions To determine which file s you need to upload you will need to determine
194. he Identify LED blink period is configurable By default the duration is two minutes If you need to increase the locate dwell time refer to Section 3 7 1 Locate Dwell Time for information 3 Optional Create an event log entry to record the controller replacement service action Login to the healthy controller and use the MARK command to create a user event log entry similar to the example below MARK CONTROLLER LOCAL TEXT Controller replacement service action initiated Change the text in above example as required 4 Capture the SFA10000 configuration information prior to the service action It is best practice to capture and save the output of the following commands in order to obtain detailed configuration information on the SFA10000 subsystem prior to the service action Also capture the same information on the healthy peer controller SHOW SUBSYSTEM SUMMARY SHOW SUBSYSTEM SUMMARY ALL APP SHOW SUBSYSTEM SUMMARY UI SHOW NETWORK LOCAL 0 UI SHOW EMAIL UI SHOW TEMP 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 162 Controller Component Failures 5 Shut down the controller to be replaced using the command SHUTDOWN CONTROLLER lt id gt 6 Verify that the controller has been shut down by checking the Power LED of the controller Figure 185 and its dedicated UPS 7 Physically replace the failed controller a Note down the cabling scheme
195. he unmodified Program The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output given its content constitutes a covered work This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent as provided by copyright law You may make run and propagate covered works that you do not convey without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you or provide you with facilities for running those works provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf under your direction and control on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below Sublicensing is not allowed section 10 makes it unnecessary 3 Protecting Users Legal Rights From Anti Circumvention Law No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996 or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures When you convey a covered work you waive any
196. hen enter the capacity in GB Click CREATE VIRTUAL DISK to create the virtual disk Figure 145 Create Virtual Disk Screen VIRTUAL DISK CREATE VIRTUAL DISK FREE TOTAL DISK WRITE READ INDEX SELECT POOL CHUNK PAID STATE RAD CAP RAW CAP TmEOUT SATAssure FENSGAL WRTJAL pack MIRRORED AHEAD aH GB GB Min CACHE CACHE 0 L pool 0 128 RAID6 21784 27360 21784 10 10 3 i af 1 r pool 1 256 RAIDS 2656 3168 2656 10 DIF 9 3 Jf 2 B pool 2 64 RAID6 1248 2112 1248 10 DIF 6 3 sA eg f 3 Oo pool 3 32 RAIDS 1248 1760 1248 10 DIF 5 3 p Jf af 4 r pool 4 256 RAID6 3040 4000 3040 10 DIF 10 3 af ao N 5 a pool 5 32 RAID6 1440 2400 1440 10 DIF 5 3 pr 6 r pool 6 128 RAID6 3040 4000 3040 10 DIF 10 3 f f z Select capacity MAX The Virtual Disk capacity will be rounded up to an 8GB boundary NOTE If MAX is typed then the maximum free capacity available in each pool will be used CREATE VIRTUAL DISK 4 7 3 Configure Virtual Disk Attributes To change a virtual disk s attributes select Virtual Disk gt Set Virtual Disk Attributes At the Set VD Attributes screen Figure 146 select the VD whose attributes you want to change Make the desired changes Click UPDATE to save the changes Figure 146 Set Virtual Disk Attributes Screen VIRTUAL DISK SET VD ATTRIBUTES SET ATTRIBUTES INDEX VD NAME POOLNAME STATE RAID CAP GB PREFERREDHOME CURRENTHOME FUTUREHOME WRITEBACKCACHE MIRRORED amp o v
197. ical condition state LOG ST SET FAILED Failed condition LOG ST SPLIT BRAIN The controllers have lost communications with each other and are operating in split brain mode LOG SYS STARTUP The system has been restarted Chapter 4 GUI Management Agent 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 101 Starting the GUI Management Agent This chapter provides information on using the SFA10000 GUI Graphic User Interface Management Agent 4 1 Starting the GUI Management Agent 4 1 1 Login Using a web browser open a link to the IP address of the SFA10000 controller The SFA Management System supports Mozilla FireFox version 3 0 11 and above as well as Microsoft Internet Explorer version 8 0 and above At the login screen Figure 113 enter the user name admin with the password password to log into the system User name and passwords are case sensitive Figure 113 GUI Login Screen Storage Fusion 10000 Username Password LOGIN 2008 DataDirect Networks All Rights Reserved datadirectnet com S24 StorageScaler and SATAssure are trademarks of DataDirect Networks OE 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 102 4 1 2 Starting the GUI Management Agent Home Screen and Health Indicators The home screen shows the Health Indicator Green color is an indication of healthy condition Figure 114 Figure 1
198. id5 Capacity 2752512 MBs Total Capacity 3522560 MBs UUID 0x00 Global Spare Pool Oxla0f000a Initializing FALSE 4 Rebuilding TRUE Paused FALSE AutoWriteLock FALSE Data Lost FALSE Current Home 0x0015b2a122b20000 0x00000000 Future Home Oxffffffffffffffff 0x00000000 Preferred Home Oxffffffffffffffff 0x00000000 BkgdJob OID 0x2b050003 BkgdJob Priority 80 Total Phy Disks 5 Spare Disk Rebuilding State NOREDUNDANCY Member Size 704512 MB pID State UUID C 0x0191 RBLD 0x5000cca215c56e02 0x004e NORM 0x5000cca215c5709c 0x0040 NORM 0x5000cca215c54c71 0x0041 NORM 0x5000cca215c5675c 0x0042 NORM 0x5000cca215c56e55 5 6 2 Spare Disk Replacement Upon completion of a rebuild the spare disk becomes a member of the storage pool replacing the failed disk After you have replaced the failed disk with a new disk the new disk is added to the Unassigned Pool It is recommended that you assign this new disk to the spare pool to replace the spare disk that has been used 5 6 3 When a Spare is not available When a disk is failed by the system and there is no spare disk available you need to replace the failed disk immediately After you have replaced the failed disk with a new disk you can initiate a rebuild as described below 1 Enter command SHOW UNASSIGNED_POOL ALL to identify the new disk s index name 2 Enter command ASSIGN PHYSICAL DISK lt new disk id gt TO_POOL lt pool id gt SET_SPARE where lt new d
199. ified LUN number that the virtual disk will show to the host NOTE When there are no presentations mapping to LUN 0 for a host SFA OS will present a controller LUN processor a LUN 0 of SCSI peripheral device type 03h 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 47 Configuring the SFA10000 Follow these steps to set up a presentation 1 To display the currently available initiators enter the command Figure 61 APPLICATION SHOW DISCOVERED INITIATOR Figure 61 Display Available Initiators RAIDS app show discovered_initiator Initiator Identifier Controller 0 Controller 1 Index Type ID node port RPO RP 1 RPO RP 1 00001 FC 0x0000e8 0x2001001b32ae096c 0x2101001b32ae096c 00002 FC 0x0000e8 0x2001001b32aeb580 0x2101001b32aeb580 00003 FC 0x0000e8 0x2001001b328e0280 0x2001001b328e0280 00004 FC 0x0000e8 0x2001001b32ae176c 0x2001001b32ae176c 00005 FC 0x0000e8 0x2001001b328eb580 0x2001001b328eb580 00006 FC 0x0000e8 0x2001001b32aeb280 0x2001001b32aeb280 2 00007 FC 0x0000e8 0x2001001b328e176c 0x2001001b328e176c 1 00008 FC 0x0000e8 0x2001001b328e096c 0x2101001b328e096c 3 Total FC Initiators 8 2 Create a host Enter the command Figure 62 APPLICATION CREATE HOST NAME lt host name gt OSTYPE BOS NASSCALER MS CLUSTER CUSTOM DEFAULT GENERIC LINUX WINDOWS MAC OS where lt host name gt is an assigned host name to help make map
200. ime making the storage pool inoperative Reseating is an option here to see if the disk would come back This is similar to the AMIS condition but in this case it does not matter what order the MNRB disks become active MISS Disk is MISSing This is either not electrically active or seen or only one controller sees it in a couplet system Reseating would be a first recommendation as a fractional rebuild would happen if it then appears to both controllers Replacing would cause a full rebuild FAIL Disk is FAILed and is unassigned This means that the disk timeout has either expired or the disk had errors and had been failed FAIL in the storage pool command means that it has been failed out of the storage pool not necessarily the state of the disk This is being renamed to EMPTY RBLD Disk is ReBuiLDing 1 partial ready This state is a condition where the disk is only seen on the local controller r partial ready This state is a condition where the disk is only seen on the remote controller partial ready This state is a condition where the disk is not seen on either controller but is assumed to be present This represents that the physical disk is being used as a quorum drive 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 58 Storage Pool Management 3 3 Storage Pool Management The SFA10000 creates centrally managed and vendor independent storage pooling It enables different ty
201. in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits The supplier is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide xii Preface changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation European Regulations This equipment complies with European Regulations EN 55022 Class A Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Disturbance Characteristics of Information Technology Equipments and EN50082 1 Generic Immunity Canadian Regulations ICES 003 Class A Notice Avis NMB 003 Classe A This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB 0
202. ing selling offering for sale or importing the Program or any portion of it 11 Patents A contributor is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based The work thus licensed is called the contributor s contributor version A contributor s essential patent claims are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor whether already acquired or hereafter acquired that would be infringed by some manner permitted by this License of making using or selling its contributor version but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version For purposes of this definition control includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License Each contributor grants you a non exclusive worldwide royalty free patent license under the contributor s essential patent claims to make use sell offer for sale import and otherwise run modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version In the following three paragraphs a patent license is any express agreement or commitment however denominated not to enforce a patent such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement To grant such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party
203. ion RAID 0 clear subsystem configuration Are you sure you want to delete this configuration No yes Are you sure you want to delete this configuration All data will be lost No yes RAID SUBSYSTEM CONFIGURATION cleared STATUS Success 0x0 215 Set the System Name You may set the system name using the command Figure 44 SET SUBSYSTEM NAME lt name gt To verify the new setting enter the command SHOW SUBSYSTEM ALL ATTRIBUTES Figure 44 Set Subsystem Name RAID 0 set subsystem name SFA10000 SUBSYSTEM attributes set STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 0 show subsystem all RP Subsystem Name SFA10000 UID 600001 0800a 000000000030000000 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 38 Configuring the SFA10000 276 Set System Time amp Date NTP NTP Network Time Protocol mode is available on the SFA10000 You can enter up to four NTP addresses as the time servers To enable the NTP mode enter the command SET SUBSYSTEM NTP lt ip address list up to 4 gt NONE Specifying a list of NTP addresses will start the NTP mode on each controller using that list of NTP addresses as the time servers Specifying NONE will turn off NTP mode To display the current settings enter the command Figure 45 SHOW SUBSYSTEM ALL ATTRIBUTES Figure 45 Show NTP Settings TO RK RK KR RK E Subsystem KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK RP Subsystem Name SFA10000 UID 60001
204. is always mentioned for all I O operations e ReACT Intelligent Cache Management Analyzes and optimizes I O traffic to write large file sequential data directly to disk and preserve valuable cache for random I O transactions e Battery Backed Write Back Cache SFA OS provides a write back cache feature that is used to improve I O performance Write back cache data that has not been written to disk is preserved by maintaining 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 3 Introduction power to the cache memory in the event of an AC mains failure long enough to copy the contents of the cache to stable storage In addition SFA OS is designed to tolerate a simultaneous AC mains failure Mirrored Write Back Cache Currently SFA OS provides the ability to mirror all write back cache data such that the failure of a single controller will not result in data loss A storage administrator can optionally turn off write back cache mirroring for a RAID set for higher performance however data protection is reduced for logical units within that RAID set Mirrored Transaction Journal RAID write holes are prevented by executing stripe updates as ACID Atomicity Consistency Isolation Durability transactions If the transactions are interrupted by a power failure they can be recovered from the transaction journal implemented within the write back cache when power is restored This journal is mirrored so that should a
205. isk and any specific constraints for access A container formed by a set of Physical Disk extents and controlled by one of the RAID algorithms such as RAID6 RAID Processor Single Controller A set of physical disks that are used as spares in one or more storage pools A set of physical disks whose extents may be parts of RAIDset s The set of physical disks that are not assigned to any pool A set of disk blocks that may be presented to an operating system It is also the primary logical object realized by the back end DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 195 Index 96 00259 001 AA AC power requirement 18 airflow 16 AP 194 application processor controller 9 application stack 194 B background job 90 battery replace UPS 146 cC cable replace 167 cache mirrored write back set 88 ReACT set 88 write back set 88 CLUI using 53 controller application processor 9 fan 8 fan replace 160 hardware 5 internal disk modules 9 internal disk replace 161 IO ports 10 LED status 7 mark event log 95 power cycle 87 power supply 8 power supply replace 159 RAID processor 9 synchronize log disk 95 cooling requirements 17 create spare pool 45 70 storage pool 41 virtual disk 43 customer service contacting 199 D DataDirect Networks contacting 199 date set system 83 delete storage pool 65 virtual disk 68 DEM replace SS6000 166 DIP switch UPS 33 discovered initiators
206. isk id gt is the index name of the replacement disk and lt pool id gt is the OID of the storage pool that had the failed disk 5 6 4 Manual Rebuild You may manually replace a failed disk using the REPLACE command REPLACE PHYSICAL DISK lt id gt NEW_DISK lt new disk id gt A Replace operation is used to replace a failed disk with a healthy spare disk The operation can take several hours to complete depending on the size of the disk and speed of the replace operation The rate of rebuild can be adjusted see Section 3 11 5 Rebuild Policy Priority on page 91 for more information 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 156 Recovery from Disk Failure 5 6 9 Power Cycling SATA Disk Drives SATA disks can get wedged and stop working When this occurs power cycling may bring the disk back on line To power cycle a disk enter the CLUI command SET SLOT lt enclosure id gt lt slot id gt POWER NOTE Disk power cycling requires an interposer that supports power cycling Whether a disk can be power cycled depends on the following factors e Enclosure Enclosure type Enclosure firmware version e Interposer Multiplexor Interposer type Interposer hardware version Table 8 shows the current enclosures and interposers along with whether they can be power cycled or not Table 8 Disk Slot Power Cycle Support Enclosure Interposer Power Cycle Suppo
207. isks Screen POOL NAME HEALTH PD STATE TI100042455 TI100042088 STI1000K2NSS STIIDONINES STINNONNNES STIINONNINSS 4 4 4 Assign Disks to Pool You can add a disk to a spare pool or a storage pool at any time select Physical Disks gt Assign to Pool Figure 132 Select the disk s and the pool Click ASSIGN TO POOL to save the changes Figure 132 Assign Disks to Pool Screen INDEX SELECT PHYSICAL Type SPEED HEALTH FORMATTED DISK ENCL VENDOR propuCTID PRODUCT SERIAL NUMBER DISK OID RPM CAPACITY GB SLOT OSURE ID REVISION 18 F 0x25ae0090 SATA 7200 GOOD 1863 1 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1171YAGR63DS w F Ox25ad008 SATA 7200 GOOD 1863 9 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA20N JK1170YAGR35VP 146 r 0x25b00092 SATA 7200 GOOD 1863 14 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1170YAGRPV7P 145 r 0x25at0091 SATA 7200 GOOD 1863 27 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1170YAGRPVEP 1 r 0x25530095 SATA 7200 GOOD 1863 29 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKADA3EA JK1171YAHOJPNN 141 0x25ab008d SATA 7200 GOOD 1863 50 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1171YAGV13VN 1 r 0x25520094 SATA 7200 GOOD 1863 56 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1171YAGRNTMS INDEX SELECT POOL NAME POOL TYPE DRIVE TYPES ENCLOSURE LIST SMALLEST DRIVE ASSIGN POLICY DRIVE TYPE SPEED GB SIZE GB 19 c pool19 STORAGE SATASATASATA SATA SATA 1111111 1863 SATA 7200 RPM 1863 22 G ORDE SPARE SATA SATA SATA 111 1863 NANANA cance 9
208. isplay options and click VIEW LOGS to display the log Figure 127 Figure 126 View Log Entries Screen CONTROLLERS VIEW LOG ENTRIES UP TIME DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 109 96 00259 001 MANUAL INDEX CONTROLLER FIRMWARE HARDWARE LOCAUREMOTE PRIMARY days RESTART crasHpump LOGDISK NTP NAME VERSION VERSION STATE ide PENDING ENABLED ENABLED INTERVENTION syng REQUIRED i 0 days other 0 A 142 8540 0000 RUNNING REMOTE aaa NONE se O days other 1 B 1 4 2 8540 0000 RUNNING LOCAL Pa 7 40 p NONE Maer GET EVENTS FROM CONTROLLER A Order of log entries OLDER EVENTS NEWER EVENTS Print direction ASCENDING DESCENDING Count of log entries 100 Starting log sequence fo number VIEW LOGS Figure 127 View Log Screen Event logs from controller A a Near DATE Imme SEVERITY LoG D ROMPO MESSAGE 2011 3 G POOL 00141 INITIALIZATION COMPLETED STATUS 011938 10 26 20 07 27 3122760 Information LOG ST INIT COMPLETE STATE STS JS GBL SUCCESS 011937 FAA 19 58 19 3131979 Information LOG_ST_INIT_COMPLETE STATE BOO Aes TILA RON COMPLETED STATUS 011936 FAR 19 45 05 9986782 Information LOG ST INIT COMPLETE STATE PO NT AN COMPLETED STATUS 011925 je 19 42 25 6241082 Information LOG ST INIT COMPLETE STATE ks pe gjer COMPLETED STATUS 011934 FS 19 38 49 2714779 Information LOG ST INIT COMPLETE STATE POE NA EON COMPLETED STATUS 011933 ep 19 34 26 2880003 Information
209. it must be processed first by the non homed controller and forwarded over the same communication path used by Mirrored Write Back Cache Figure 94 Figure 94 Path to VD Utilizes the Peer Controller l Controller 0 Controller 1 FC IB 10Ge FC IB 10Ge RAM RAM 1 0 Bridge CPU CPU LY SAS I Properly configured and tested host side multi path drivers will ensure right side I O will occur If poor performance is encountered especially upon initial configuration then verifying and correcting your primary path to disks is essential 1 0 Bridge 11 Verify by reviewing the virtual disk counters enter the command Figure 95 SHOW VD COUNTERS NOTE You need to enter this command three times first time to initiate the counters second time to display the results third time to reset the counters Controller 0 s results are displayed on the left and controller 1 s results are displayed on the right In Figure 95 if VD 102 is mastered by controller 0 all of the I O is passing through controller 1 thus doing wrong side I O Figure 95 Show Virtual Disk Counters Example Screen RAID 0 show vd counters Virtual disk Counters Elapsed time 12 181 seconds Idx IOs sec KiB sec KiB IO Fwd IO s Fwd KiB s IOs sec KiB sec KiB IO Fwd IO s Fwd KiB s 102 0 0 0 0 0 6580 109243 68 0
210. ition The alert message below the orange Health Indicator indicates the component that requires attention Figure 117 Show Subsystem Screen Health Indicator NAME TIME NTP MODE NTP IP ADDR TPIPADDR NTPIPADDR NTP IP ADDR SFA10000 Wed Oct 26 2 50 35 2011 ATTENTION REQUIRED Mises Disks A Storage Pools 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 104 Subsystem Menu 4 2 2 Set Subsystem Attributes To change the subsystem s attributes select Subsystem gt Set Subsystem Attributes Figure 118 illustrates the Set Subsystem Attributes screen Make the desired changes and click UPDATE to save the changes Figure 118 Set Subsystem Attributes Screen SUBSYSTEM SET ATTRIBUTES NAME TIME NTP MODE NTP IP ADDR NTP IP ADDR NTP IP ADDR NTP IP ADDR SFA10000 Wed Oct 26 2 53 47 2011 SET SUBSYSTEM ATTRIBUTES Subsystem Name SFA10000 31 characters max Locate Time 120 seconds 0 65535 Pool Verify Priority Con OFF Date and Time yyvy mm dd hour 0 23 minutes 0 59 seconds 0 59 Network time Con off IP addresses for NTP FE Td Max 4 IP addresses UPDATE 4 2 2 1 NTP Settings NTP Network Time Protocol mode is available on the SFA10000 It provides a means for the controllers to synchronize their time across a network usually within a small number of milliseconds over a long period of time You can enter up to four NTP addresses as the time
211. k A rebuild then occurs immediately reducing the possibility of data loss due to additional disk failures NOTE Each storage pool should have a spare pool assigned to it If a storage pool s attributes show Global Spare Pool UNASSIGNED no spare pool will serve this storage pool 3 5 1 Display Spare Pool Information Use the SHOW SPARE POOL command to display the list of configured spare pool s Figure 85 Figure 85 Show Configured Spare Pools Example Screen RAID 0 show spare pool Disk Total rctan Storage T dx Idx Name Blocks O Cap GB PDs Pool 6 spare pool 6 512 10 528 2 7 spare pool 7 512 10 528 2 Total Spare Pools 2 To display the detailed information of the spare pool enter the command SHOW SPARE POOL lt id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES command Figure 86 Figure 86 Show Spare Pool Attributes Example Screen 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 69 RAID 0 show spare pool 6 all Index 6 OID 0x19bc0006 Type GLOBAL SPARE Name 9bc0006 Block Size 0x200 DiskTimeout FRT 0 minutes Total Capacity 409024 MBs UUID 0x00 Total Phy Disks 2 Storage Pool List ndex 0 OID 0x1c790000 Spare Pool Management To display the list of disks in the spare pool enter the command Figure 87 SHOW SPARE POOL lt id gt PHYSICAL DISKS Figure 87 Show Spare Pool Physical Disks Example Screen RAID 0 show spare pool 6 pd Health
212. k Enclosure Width 17 6 447 mm Depth 19 3 490 mm Weight 53 Ibs 27 kg with disk modules Voltage range 100 240 VAC amp 50 60 Hz Maximum average 550W output power Operating environment 5 C to 35 C 20 80 non condensing temperature relative humidity Non operating environment 10 C to 50 C 20 80 non condensing temperature relative humidity Agency certifications UL CE cUL C Tick FCC NOTE Specifications subject to change without notice nnn EEE cc cee ee en ne eee ee ee ee 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 172 96 00259 001 FRU Part Numbers This appendix provides the list of field replaceable unit FRU part numbers Controller FRU FRU Part Number oe Description FRU 10K PS 2 Power supply module FRU 10K FM 4 Fan module FRU 10K RLK 1 24 inch rail kit FRU 10K IHD 3 1TB SATA Internal hard drive cache protect and firmware FRU 10K BBU 1 UPS includes UPS rail kit and cables FRU 10K BBUB UPS FRU 10K BBU replacement battery 10KS BLKFC FR SFA10000 controller with 8 FC 8 ports 10KS BLKIB FR SFA10000 controller with 4 QDR IB SRP ports S56000 Disk Enclosure FRU FRU Part Number bane Description FRU 60S RLK3 1 Adjustable rail kit FRU 60S CMA2 1 Cable management arms FRU 60S PS3 2 Power supply module FRU 60S DEM 8 DEM module FRU 60S IOM2 2 I O module KI
213. ks e Twenty 60 bay disk enclosures with up to 1200 disk modules at 88U in two racks e Five 24 bay disk enclosures with up to 120 disk modules at 18U in one rack Figure 1 SFA10000 Possible Configurations 9 Component System 14 Component System 24 Component System 2 Controllers amp 2 UPS 2 Controllers amp 2 UPS 2 Controllers amp 2 UPS 5 Disk Enclosures 10 Disk Enclosures 20 Disk Enclosures 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 2 Introduction 1 1 3 Features of the SFA10000 The SFA10000 incorporates the following features e 8GB s full duplex cache link e Internal SAS Switching 480 Gb s Internal SAS Storage Network Up to 1200 SAS SATA or SSD disks with full redundant paths InfiniBand IB or Fibre Channel FC Connectivity on SFA10000 For SFA10000 IB option the two Controllers provide up to eight 8 QDR InfiniBand host port connections For SFA10000 FC option the two Controllers provide up to sixteen 16 individual 8Gb s Fibre Channel host port connections including simultaneous access to the same data through multiple ports Each FC host port supports point to point and switched fabric operation e InfiniBand or 10 Gigabit Ethernet Connectivity on SFA10000E The SFA10000E provides up to 16 individual IB or 10GbE ports for host access to the Virtual Machines Each port can be configured to run as either InfiniBand QDR or 10 Gigabit Ethernet 10 Gigabit Ethernet connectivity requir
214. latches which will cam the module into place Figure 191 Insert Disk Module 4 After you have installed all the disk modules in this enclosure close the enclosure covers and engage both cover release handles Replace the two Phillips screws 5 Squeeze the tabs on both rack slides and push the enclosure back into the rack 96 00259 001 Rev E DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 176 Disk Module Installation C 3 SS2460 Disk Module Installation Procedure NOTE To maintain proper airflow and cooling a disk module or a dummy disk module must be installed in every slot of the enclosure 1 Press the handle release button on the disk module to release the handle Figure 192 Figure 192 Disk Module Handle Release Button Lever Release Button 2 Hold the disk module so that the LEDs are on the bottom and the handle is fully open 3 Slide the disk module into the slot until the handle starts to close Figure 193 Figure 193 Insert Disk Module into Disk Slot 4 Gently push the handle down to cam the module home You should hear a click as the latch engages and holds the handle closed Figure 194 Figure 194 Close Handle on Disk Module 96 00259 001 Rev E DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 177 S56000 Disk Maps for SFA10000E The charts below illustrate the disk maps for proper placement in the SS6000 disk enclosures when used with the SFA1000
215. legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing against the work s users your or third parties legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures 4 Conveying Verbatim Copies You may convey verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice keep intact all notices stating that this License and any 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide v Important Information non permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee 5 Conveying Modified Source Versions You may convey a work based on the Program or the modifications to produce it from the Program in the form of source code under the terms of section 4 provided that you also meet all of these conditions a The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it and giving a relevant date b The work must
216. ler issue the SHUTDOWN command via CLUI or GUI first then use the UPS s Power button to turn off power to the controller Refer to Section 3 10 2 Shut Down Power Cycle for more information Table 1 Controller Status LED Indicators Description Color Status Power Green ON power is applied to controller enclosure OFF no power is applied to controller enclosure Locate Blue Flashing at a 2 second interval receiving Locate Enclosure command Identify OFF NOT receiving Locate Enclosure command Enclosure Amber ON a fan failure power supply failure or over temperature condition Fault occurred A service action is required OFF no detectable faults HDD Green Flashes indicates HDD activity OFF no HDD activity Ethernet ICL Green _ Flashes indicates the corresponding ICL link is up and both controllers are running OFF no ICL activity Network Green ON good connection is established on the corresponding Ethernet port Activity Flashes indicates activity O 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 7 The SFA10000 System Hardware 1 2 2 Fan Module Each controller is equipped with four fan modules Figure 7 and each fan module contains two fans These fan modules provide redundant cooling system for the unit If one module fails the other three will maintain sufficient cooling for the enclosure The presence of a faulty fan module
217. losure Fault LED on the front panel will turn amber You can determine if a fan has failed using the CLUI command SHOW FAN The position of the failed fan should match the label FAN1 FAN2 FAN3 or FAN4 on the front of the controller If a fan has failed you must replace it Once you remove it you must replace it within 5 minutes to prevent the system from over heating NOTE Obtain a replacement module of the same type before removing any faulty module Follow these steps to replace a fan module NOTE Attempting to replace more than one fan module simultaneously will cause the controller to fail 1 Identify the failed fan 2 Loosen the module s thumbscrew Figure 183 Figure 183 Controller Fan Removal Thumbscrew 3 Grab the handle and slide the module out of the bay 4 Slide the new module into the bay making sure that it is fully inserted 5 Tighten the thumbscrew to secure it 6 Verify that the Enclosure Fault LED is no longer amber indicating that the new module is operating normally 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 160 dd 96 00259 001 Controller Component Failures Replacing an Internal Disk Module Follow these steps to replace an internal disk module at the front of the controller 1 2 3 4 5 Disengage the lock using the supplied key Press the handle release button to release the handle Figure 184 Pull the mod
218. mmand 1 At the CLUI prompt type CREATE POOL RAID LEVEL 1 5 6 CHUNK SIZE 32 64 128 256 ASSIGN POLICY SAS SATA NUMBER 2 5 6 9 10 or PHYSICAL DISK lt list of disks gt SATASSURE NONE DATA INTEGRITY FIELD PARITY INITIALIZE POLICY ALLOW IO NO IO DONT CARE You may either explicitly select the disks for the pool by using PHYSICAL DISK or specify the number of disks in the pool by using NUMBER in which case the next available disks will be selected Figure 48 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 41 Configuring the SFA10000 Figure 48 Create Storage Pool Example 1 RAID 0 create pool raid level raid5 chunk size 64kb physical disk 0x6c Ox6d Ox6e Ox6f 0x70 POOL 0 OID 0x19b60000 create STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 0 create pool raid level raid6 chunk size 128kb number 6 POOL 1 OID 0x19b80001 create STATUS Success 0x0 If you specify the ASSIGN POLICY and NUMBER parameters together Figure 49 only the selected type of disks will be used for the storage pool and you will not need to enter the individual disk name Figure 49 Create Storage Pool Example 2 RAID 0 create pool raid level raid6 chunk size 128kb number 6 assign policy sas POOL 2 OID 0x19b80002 create STATUS Success 0x0 2 Use the CREATE POOL command to add more storage pools as needed If you need to delete a storage pool use the DELETE POOL lt pool id gt command
219. mmediately after the command and then subsequently periodically to check the status of the UPDATE e When you SCP the Consolidated Download File DDN to the firmware directory it must be copied to the PRIMARY controller Since the PRIMARY may change it is probably best to copy it to BOTH controllers If SHOW ENCLOSURE lt id gt UPDATE FIRMWARE PROGRESS reports status JS_ES_DL_UCODE_OPEN_FAILED the most likely cause is that the file was not copied to the PRIMARY controller e When the SFA10000 is busy rebuilding initializing or doing host I O UPDATE ENCLOSURE operations may fail because the enclosure is too busy to service the UPDATE IOs in a timely fashion Therefore make sure that there are no rebuilds initializations or host I O operations being done during the UPDATE ENCLOSURE operation In order to cause the new enclosure firmware to start being used you must power cycle the enclosure In the SFA10000 it is best to do this by doing a SHUTDOWN SUBSYSTEM followed by power cycling the enclosure This is also required to recover from an UPDATE ENCLOSURE failure These power cycles are required The UPDATE PD command starts a background operation so that the CLUI is free to do other operations during the UPDATE The status that comes back from the UPDATE PD command only indicates whether the background operation was successfully started SHOW PD UPDATE FIRMWARE PROGRESS should be used immediately after the command and then periodicall
220. n 0 For system configured with five SS7000 enclosures the output should show Zones 2 Zoning Configuration 1 To change the zoning configuration enter the command SET ENCLOSURE lt id gt ZONING CONFIGURATION O 1 use 0 for system with 10 or 20 enclosures 1x60 use 1 for system with 5 enclosures 2x30 Then power cycle the enclosure for the change to take effect 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 180 Rack Installation Procedure This appendix provides information on how to mount aSFA10000 controller and UPS unit in arack F 1 Rackmounting the Controller The SFA10000 controller is designed to fit within a 3U rack space Follow these steps to mount the controller in your rack 1 Figure 198 shows the rackmount kit for the controller There are two sets of rail and two bags of screws included Figure 198 Controller Rackmount Kit 2 The two mounting brackets should already be attached to the controller If not attach the brackets to the two sides of the controllers using six screws Figure 199 Figure 199 Mounting Bracket on Controller Use 3 Screws to Attach One Mounting Bracket 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 181 Rack Installation Procedure 3 Pull on the Front Release to unlock the inner rail from the slide assembly Figure 200 Then release the Detent Lock and push the inner rail inwards to retract the inner rail
221. n Then you will next enable the specific channels through which you wish to make the presentation APPLICATION SET PRESENTATION lt index gt ENABLE 0 1 2 3 To enable two channels it is necessary to enter two separate commands In the current implementation you can disable all channels enable all channels or enable one channel at a time through the CLUI If you wish to have two channels enabled use the following commands APPLICATION SET PRESENTATION lt index gt ENABLE 0 APPLICATION SET PRESENTATION lt index gt ENABLE 2 Channel 0 is CORPO Channel 1 is CORP1 These are the two RAID processors on controller 0 Channel 2 is C1RP0 Channel 3 is C1RP1 These are the two RAID processors on controller 1 If you have an existing storage configuration running Windows Linux presentations and you wish to ADD a VD presentation for MAC e You will have to sustain a storage outage now so that you can disable all VD presentations thru any channel and Re enable the appropriate channels one at a time that will be serving VDs to the Windows Linux hosts You will then set up the appropriate channel s that will operate in MAC mode e At this point you can restart the storage subsystem proceed in creating your MAC VD presentations and enable them through their separate channels 3 6 6 Configure Presentations of Virtual Disks to Hosts NOTE If you are configuring a storage subsystem with any MAC OSx presentations it is abs
222. n the individual spare pool name to display its detailed information Figure 149 Click on the Total Member column to display the list of disks in that spare pool Figure 149 Show Spare Pool Screen SPARE POOLS SHOW ALL SPARE POOLS INDEX SPARE POOL NAME TOTAL MEMBERS DISK TIMEOUT Mins TOTAL RAW CAPACITY GB 3 spare pool 3 10 1808 9 spare pool 9 3 10 2712 PHYSICAL SPEED poor PD MEMBER SPARE capacity DISK ENCL VENDOR PRODU INDEX Siskon RPM NAME TH STATE stare POOL GB SLOT OSURE jp PRODUCTID Revision SERIAL NUMBER 199 0x217100c7 SAS 7200 Soe GOOD READY NORMAL s 931 7 1 SEAGATE ST310004248S 0006 9WK08SGR0000C035AQK0 174 0x215800ae SAS 7200 Boe Boo GOOD READY NORMAL 931 8 1 SEAGATE ST310004248S 0006 SWKOBACNO000C034A5TG 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 121 Spare Pools 4 8 2 Locate a Spare Pool To locate a spare pool select Pools gt Locate Spare Pools At the Locate Spare Pool screen Figure 150 select the spare pool and the screen changes accordingly showing the disk locations for that pool Click LOCATE to flash the status LED of those disks Figure 150 Locate Spare Pool ISTORAGE POOLS LOCATE SPARE POOLS INDEX SPARE POOL NAME TOTAL MEMBERS DISK TIMEOUT Mins TOTAL RAW CAPACITY GB 3 spare pool 3 3 10 2712 9 spare pool 9 3 10 2712 Enclosure 1 Pool spare pool 3 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 4 8 3 Create a Spare
223. n the software and 2 offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify it For the developers and authors protection the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software For both users and authors sake the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them although the manufacturer can do so This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users freedom to change the software The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use which is precisely where it is most unacceptable Therefore we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products If such problems arise substantially in other domains we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL as needed to protect the freedom of users Finally every program is threatened constantly by software patents States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on general purpose computers but in those that do we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary To prevent this the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the
224. nce eee eneeneaes 117 47 Virtual Disks Mena suse edaided do oasweesnad deenne etat de dren vide 118 4 7 1 Show List of Virtual Disks oreonenuaneneneneananenerenennanenenenener 118 47 2 Create a Virtual Disk asanananuvnanenenennenenenenenennenenenenenner 119 47 3 Configure Virtual Disk Attributes 0 2 0 0 cece cece eee eee tence enes 119 474 Delete a Virtual Disk a anananuananenenennenenenenennnnenenenenenner 120 48 Spare POOS i inesa selects sna sieu ater eben aie dlawiaueded seres release 121 4 8 1 Show Spare Pools 4 s s0 ccs ddan cid aagaader edie deadanciiaisvadennt 121 48 2 Locate a Spare Pool asanenennananenenennnnenenenenennanenenenenene 122 48 3 Create a Spare Pool asanenennnnanenenennnnanenenennnnanenenenenene 122 48 4 Assign Spare Pool to Storage Pool cece eee eee e eee eect ene nes 123 48 5 Set Spare Pool Attributes rwuuananenennanenenenenennanenenenenenr 124 48 6 DeleteaSparePool asananenunnanenenennnnanenenenennanenenenenene 124 48 7 Delete a Disk from Spare Pool ccc cect eee cence cnet eee eneneeees 124 29 PEGTAIONS Liu ekke atu ebetarstnaeeny skeen nts 125 4 9 1 Presentation Menu viccaviasatcaeiand warded medias ans aaa eee eae Yoda aa 126 49 2 Show Presentations awanenennananenenennnnenenenenenneneneneneneen 126 4 9 3 Set Up a Presentation rwuvnanananenenevenenevenenenennenenerenener 126 4 9 3 1 Create a HOSticcsn odie head dave diese
225. ndex UNASSIGNED Pool OID UNASSIGNED Capacity 824 GB Raw Capacity 863 GB Base 2 2000 GB Base 10 Block Size 512 Enabled Disk Ch 0x2b4 Oxdl Enclosure Index Enclosure OID 0x50000001 Disk Slot Led Vendor ID SEAGATE Product ID ST32000444SS Product Revision 0006 Serial Number 9WMODRNO0000C0331WFJ Health State FAILED Rotation Speed 7200 RPM Device Type SAS Member State UNASSIGNED State READY Spare FALSE Failed TRUE Quorum FALS UUID 0x5000c50010444e40 Update in Progress FALSE 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 57 Physical Disk Information 322 Disk States Listed below are the possible disk states NORM READY Disk is in a normal or functional condition AMIS Disk is Already MISsing The disk in this state must return prior to the other disks If the specific disk that is in this state never returns to the pool the pool will remain inoperative Replacing this disk to do rebuild will do nothing WTRB Disk is Waiting To ReBuild A disk went missing then came back and is rebuilding either partial or full Then other disks in the storage pool went missing causing it to g0 inoperative which halts the rebuild Now waiting for other disks in the system to become active again MNRB Disk is Missing with No ReBuild This is the same as missing but when the disk comes back there is nothing to rebuild This could happen when multiple disks fail at the same t
226. neer that the floor structure is sufficient to hold the weight of the SFA10000 racks configured as planned in Section 2 2 2 Rack Location Air Flow and Access 2 2 4 Cooling Supply Planning Each SFA10000 45U rack can draw up to 14 5 KW and can generate 50 KBTU hour of heat Each SFA10000 42U racks can draw over 8 KW and can generate 25 KBTU hour of heat Sufficient air conditioning must be provided to cool this heat load to a nominal room temperature of 25 C DDN will provide an estimate of power and heat for each rack on request To Do List I Verify that the rack locations will have sufficient cooling 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 17 Site Preparation 225 AC Power Supply Planning and Verification Each SFA10000 rack has two to eight PDUs Power Distribution Unit that are designed to connect to 208 VAC or 230 VAC DDN will provide a count of the power cords for each rack on request Figure 20 and Figure 21 below show the various types of PDU input and output connectors Before the SFA10000 racks can be installed sufficient receptacles for these PDUs must be installed by an electrician Figure 20 PDU Input Connectors NEMA L6 30P IEC 60309 P N E 56P332 Plug CS8365C Plug Fits into L6 30R Receptacle Also known as IEC 309 P N E Australia North America 32A 220V 50A 250V North America Europe amp Other Single Phase Max 250V 30A Max 250V 32A 3 phase Twist Lock Single Phase
227. nnected to the IOM that needs to be replaced back to the associated SFA controller Each of the cables is labeled with a 3 digit number that has the form 0xx or 1xx All of the cables with labels beginning with 0 go to one controller and all of those beginning with 1 go to the other controller In cases where more than one SFA10000 is installed in a set of racks each couplet reuses the same cable labels so be careful not to confuse couplets 4 Determine the index of the associated controller Use the LOCATE CONTROLLER lt id gt command to flash the blue Locate LED on the front panel 5 Shut down the associated controller Enter the SHUTDOWN CONTROLLER lt id gt command where lt id gt is the index of the controller which was determined in Step 4 This will cause all pools to fail over to the other controller 6 Physically replace the failing IOM 7 Restart the controller that was shut down Press the Power button on the controller s UPS Allow the controller to start Eventually the pools will fail back to the controller that was shut down 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 165 Disk Enclosure Component Failures 5 8 2 DEM Replacement on SS6000 Please refer to the DDN SS6000 User Guide if you need detailed instructions on how to physically replace a DEM The following procedure describes how to replace reseat or swap a failing DEM 1 Identify the DEM that needs to be replaced
228. nnvananannnunennnnnunnnnnennennunennener 33 26 Powering On the Systems cccecsevseug ovencesice seeds talewsaietee unnsetning 33 27 Configuring the SFAIOOOG Lu ling evaseaaceveersarsadauwaeessbassaaeeeedeiadeted 35 2 7 1 Planning Your Setup and Configuration cece eee eee e en eee e ee 35 2 7 2 Serial Interface Configuration 0 cece cece eee nent e tence enes 36 27 3 ValidatetheHardware asanenunnananenenennanenenenennanenenenenene 36 2 7 4 Clear System Configuration not applicable to SFA10000E 38 27 5 Setthe System N meuusreasiter hade ke ii pene kn 38 2 7 6 Set System Time amp Date NTP 0 0 0 cece cece cece eee eee eee cnet eeneaens 39 2 7 7 Configure Network Interface Settings cece eee cee n eee eens 39 2 7 8 Access Virtual Machines SFA10000E Only cece cece eee e eens 40 2 7 9 Create Storage Pools cece cece cece ene e reece eee e ne enennenes 41 27 10 Create Virtual Disks aauananenennaneneneneneenenenenenennenenenenene 43 2 7 11 Create and Assign Spare Pools cece cee cece eee cnet een ean eaes 45 2 7 12 Present Virtual Disk to External Host not applicable to SFA10000E 47 2 7 12 1 Special Considerations for MAC OS ccc cece cece cece cece eect eeees 50 2 7 12 2 Selective Presentation 6 ccc ccc cece cece cece cece cece eee eeeeenees 50 2 7 13 Storage Pool Initialization cece cece cence nen een
229. ntrollers cc cceeee cece ee eneeee eee eeeenaees 87 3 11 Performance Management i cs cess saaa debet seacis 88 3 11 1 Cache Coherency eee cece eee cece e nent Crta ne en een eneenes 88 3 11 1 1 Cache Protection 0 cece cece cece cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeennees 88 3 11 2 Single Controller Write Back Cache Policy 0 eee ee eee nee eenes 88 3113 Right SIDE W O ua eee dase ae ged 89 3 11 4 Background Job Priority cece cece eee ence eee e ene e ene 90 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide xviii Table of Contents 3 11 4 1 Pause Resume a JOb 2 cece eee eee n eee eee eee enneeeeeeeeneenaees 91 3115 Rebuild Policy PriOtity 4 csictiscearssivdisedasr catia ane iae setae dersasaaeas 91 3512 The Systemlogs eerca EERENS nS a SERI SER ce annuals Ruraiesenleeauang Manes 93 3 12 1 Displaying Event Logs esc e eee cece een eee sssi isidici tsi isisa 93 3 12 2 Event LOG Structur eniin iren nkan EE nO DEAE IE EEOAE beate sla h nda 94 3 123 5FAOS Tetimsin the LOG aversjon EE EEEE EEEE NRE RENES 94 3 124 Marking Event Logs ssrsrsiridrirr artirina nie a 95 3 12 5 Synchronize Log Disks cece cece a a i 95 3 13 Remote Management of SFAT0000 Li snsis cscececapacr eee edonagads ee beeandanaces 96 3 13 1 Network Connection cece SEVES cece eee nent ene e nen een enes 96 3 13 2 Display Network Interface Attributes cece cece c
230. ntrollers pull down menu Figure 122 Controllers Menu Controllers CLUI Interface Restart Controller Set Controller Attributes Show Controllers Show IOC Shutdown Controller Update Firmware View logs Show Controllers The Show Controllers function display the list of controllers installed in the system Figure 123 Click on the controller name to bring up its detailed information If a Manual Intervention Required condition is present click on the highlighted event to get detailed information Figure 123 Show All Controllers Screen CONTROLLERS SHOW ALL CONTROLLERS UP TIME RESTART CRASI LOGDISK MANUAL INDEX CONTROLLER FIRMWARE HARDWARE LOCAUREMOTE PRIMARY days HDUMP TP NAME VERSION VERSION STATE ey ee Ni steen ree 7 0 days other 0 A 142 8540 0000 RUNNING REMOTE ee i i NONE oer e 0 days other 1 B 442 8540 0000 RUNNING LOCAL 7 7 Wone oer Set Controller Attributes To change the controller s attributes select Controllers gt Set Controller Attributes Figure 124 illustrates the Set Controller Attributes screen Make the desired changes and click UPDATE to save the changes Figure 124 Set Controller Attributes Screen SET CONTROLLER ATTRIBUTES P TIME MANUAL RESTART LOGDISK INDEX CONTROLLER FIRMWARE HARDWARE Avensis sn TET CRASHDUMP NTP NAME VERSION VERSION STATE mammy PENDING ENABLED ENABLED INTERVENTION smc I 0 A 1 4 2 8540 0000 RUNNING REMOTE con
231. o create an empty configuration NOTE This creates a new configuration and the old configuration will be deleted if existed MIR_NOT_LAST_CONTROLLER This controller found a valid configuration but was not present when another controller owned the configuration Since the controller was not present it does not know if another controller may have cached data for this configuration This may happen when controllers are swapped out or if the controllers went down and restarted individually In many cases this MIR state will resolve itself by communicating with the other controller and obtaining permission to use the found configuration If the MIR state does not resolve itself in 3 minutes contact DDN Technical Support MIR_MULTIPLE_JIS Multiple configurations were found on the quorum disks This may happen if the disks from one system were installed in another system when the systems were powered down and then rebooted If the disks were installed in the system while running then this should not be an issue A list of found configurations will be listed Use the CLEAR SUBSYSTEM MIR STATE ID lt id gt command to use the specified ID s configuration MIR_DUAL_NO_AGREE The two connected controllers do not agree on the ID of the configuration This may occur if one controller saw a subset of the disks and the other controller saw a different subset of disks Please refer to the installation guidelines for proper setup MIR_CONFIG_MISMATCH
232. obtained the new firmware files select Enclosures gt Update Enclosure Firmware Figure 164 Update Enclosure Firmware Screen ENCLOSURE UPDATE FIRMWARE PREDICTED CHASIS CHASIS gt ENCLOSURE VENDOR PRODUCT FAULT LOCATE BASEBOARD BASEBOARD SERIAL BASEBOARD BIOS BMC BMC Firmware NE ao E LOWA n D 1D REVISION ZONES INDICATOR jr ear INDICATOR PART No No SE PART SERIAL Ver Ver Config Ver o No TCA 00341 0x50000001 DISK 0x50001210020000 DDN 887000 0402 1 orp USE13000098RB010 04 02 01 2 0x50000002 DISK 0x50001f21002e000 0402 0 3 0x50000003 DISK 0x50001f210026000 DDN 887000 0402 1 ed USE13000098RB013 04 02 01 4 TCA 00341 0x50000004 DISK 0x50001210035000 DDN 887000 0402 1 Ore USE13000098R8008 04 02 01 z TCA 00341 0x50000005 DISK 0x5000121003a000 DDN 887000 0402 1 Dip USE13000098R805C 04 02 01 A TCA 00341 0x50000006 DISK 0x50001f210038000 DDN 887000 0402 1 oip USE1300008RB009 04 02 01 TCA 00341 7 0x50000007 DISK 0x500014210020000 DDN 887000 0402 1 O15 USE13000098RB017 04 02 01 tea nnaaa El Select Firmware file NNN Browse UPDATE ENCLOSURE FIRMWARE At the Update Firmware screen Figure 164 click to select the enclosure to update Locate the firmware file and click UPDATE ENCLOSURE FIRMWARE Then follow the onscreen instructions to complete the update Also refer to Section 5 4 3 Disk Enclosure Firmware Update Procedure on page 139 for detailed instructions 96 00259 001 DataDirect
233. ol 1 At the CLUI prompt enter the command CREATE SPARE POOL Figure 55 Amessage is displayed to indicate whether the new spare pool creation was successful Figure 55 Create Spare Pool Example Screen RAID 0 create spare pool SPARE POOL 6 OID 0x19bc0006 create STATUS Success 0x0 2 Assign physical disk s to the spare pool Enter the command ASSIGN PHYSICAL DISK lt disk id gt TO POOL lt pool id gt where lt disk id gt is the index name of the disk to be added and lt pool id gt is the index name of the spare pool A message is displayed to indicate whether the disk has been added to the spare pool Figure 56 Figure 56 Assign Physical Disk to Spare Pool Example Screen RAID 0 assign physical disk 648 to_pool 6 PHYSICAL DISK 648 OID 0x22b10288 assigned to POOL 6 OID 0x19bc0006STATUS Success 0x0 To view the list of available disks enter the command SHOW UNASSIGNED POOL PHYSICAL DISK 3 Use the CREATE SPARE POOL and ASSIGN PHYSICAL DISK commands to create more spare pools as needed If you need to delete a disk from the spare pool enter the command ASSIGN PHYSICAL DISK lt disk id gt TO POOL 0x1800ffff To delete a spare pool enter the command DELETE SPARE_POOL lt pool id gt 4 You may assign a name to a spare pool using the command SET SPARE lt spare pool id gt NAME lt name gt 5 To view the list of configured spare pool s enter the command SHOW SPARE P
234. ol select Pools gt Delete Spare Pool At the Delete Spare Pool screen Figure 155 select the spare pool you want to delete Click DELETE SPARE POOLS You will be prompted to confirm deletion Click OK to proceed or Cancel to cancel operation Figure 155 Delete Set Spare Pool Screen SPARE POOLS DELETE SPARE POOL INDEX SELECT SPARE POOL NAME TOTAL MEMBERS DISK TIMEOUT Mins TOTAL RAW CAPACITY GB 22 Vv spare_pool 22 3 10 5472 Message from webpage x S2 Are you sure you want to delete selected spare pools cencet 4 8 7 Delete a Disk from Spare Pool If you need to remove a disk from a spare pool refer to Section 4 4 3 Remove Disk from Spare Pool on page 111 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 124 Presentations 4 9 Presentations NOTE For SFA10000E this feature is not applicable Virtual disks are only presented to the hosts that have been given authorized access A Presentation on a SFA10000 has the following components e Discovered Initiators A Discovered Initiator is defined as a Fibre Channel or InfiniBand initiator that has logged into the SFA10000 This is normally a single port on a Fibre Channel or InfiniBand HBA in an external computer e Host A Host is an abstract client of a virtual disk that has access to all data within the virtual disk This most commonly represents an external computer with one or more Fibre Channel or InfiniBand initiat
235. ole Use the IP address followed by acolon then followed by a single digit in the range 0 3 The last digit represents the VM you wish to connect to For example if the IP address of the controller is 192 168 0 1 and you want to connect to the first VM use a VNC connection address of 192 168 0 1 0 e SSH You can use a standard terminal program with SSH support to connect to a VM console This is done by specifying a specific port to the SSH connection address The valid ports are 5555 5558 each representing the VM you wish to connect to For example if the IP address of the controller is 192 168 0 1 and you want to connect to the first VM using a standard Linux shell enter root 192 168 0 1 0 NOTE The default password for the root user is password This should be changed immediately on each VM The SFA10000E initial configuration is complete at this point The procedures given in Sections 2 7 9 through 2 7 13 can be skipped With root access to each Virtual Machine you are now able to configure your EXAScaler or GRIDScaler file system 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 40 Configuring the SFA10000 2 7 9 Create Storage Pools A storage pool on a SFA10000 has the following attributes e RAID Level RAID LEVEL Storage pools can be configured to use either a RAID 1 RAID 5 or RAID 6 parity scheme For maximum data protection DataDirect Networks recommends the use of RAID 6
236. olutely required that you read and understand Section 3 6 5 Additional Configuration Considerations for Mac Hosts prior to actually doing your configuration There are three objects relationships that must be properly established in order to create a presentation of a LUN virtual disk to a host e Establish a host object for EACH host that wishes access to the SFA10000 storage system virtual disk NOTE On the storage subsystem you ONLY need to create a single host object for any all virtual disk presentations to that host 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 74 Presentations e Import a discovered initiator into an established relationship with a host object An association between a discovered initiator FC Port Node WWN World Wide Name to a host object is established in this operation This association of host port WWN to host object is maintained persistently within the subsystems configuration information along with all other information If the host to controller association is subsequently disrupted and then re established the controller is able to maintain this relationship until such time that the configuration in the storage controller is cleared or that relationship is deleted TIP Use ofa host based HBA utility such as HBAnyware or SANsurfer will allow you to examine the FC Port Node WWNSs on the host in the easiest manner e Assign a virtual disk to a host object
237. oncecunns pease EOT EEEE othe 126 4 9 3 2 Map Host to Discovered Initiators 0 0 ccc eee e eee e ence rererere 127 4 9 3 3 Present Virtual Disks to Hosts 0 0 c cece cece cece eee e eee e ee eeeeeees 127 AV Endosut es MENU vss s r re ek 128 4101 Show Enclosure S aseran tia eana aT AEE ar EA ES taes 128 4102 ShowUPS aunuuapasderserpedme septer ER dian EE O EE E o iaa 128 4 10 3 Update Enclosure Firmware wauananenennanenenenenennenenenenennen 129 Chapter 5 Support 51 RAID OIS Prompt is not shown correctly sinsrriararavvinnrvaennr ve mentees 131 52 EVENE LOG spa Ass tencnom ateets NEENA 131 5 3 Manual Intervention Required MIR States ccc cece cece sence ee eeeeeees 132 54 Firmware Update oroc iniinis nira ean Pee AIG ease 134 5 4 1 Displaying Current Firmware Version c sees eect eee e teen e eee 135 5 4 2 Controller Firmware Update Procedure 0 cece cece eee e eee e ee eee 135 5 4 2 1 Linux Environment Firmware Update from the Network 136 5 4 2 2 Windows Environment Firmware Update from the Network 137 5 4 3 Disk Enclosure Firmware Update Procedure eceeeeee cece eens 139 5 4 3 1 Enclosure File Definitions cece cece cece cee e eect eeeeeeeees 139 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide xx Table of Contents 5 4 3 2 Linux Environment Firmware Upload ccccee
238. onnections available on each controller The IB host port LED color schemes are described in Figure 14 Figure 13 SFA10000 FC Host Port LED Color Scheme 96 00259 001 3 amp See 2 3 o 1 1 o 3 2 TT wey 2 2 Yellow LED Green LED Red LED Status 8 Gbps 4 Gbps 2 Gbps Off Off Off Power off On On On Power on before firmware init Flashing Flashing Flashing Power on after firmware init Yellow Green an d Red LEDs flashing alternatively Firmware error Off Off On Flashing Online 2 Gbps link I O activity Off On Flashing Off Online 4 Gbps link I O activity On Flashing Off Off Online 8 Gbps link I O activity Flashing Off Flashing Locate Figure 14 SFA10000 10000E IB Host Port LED Color Scheme gt O Description Color Status Physical link Green ON good physical link Flashing indicates a problem with the link Data activity Yellow ON no data transfer Flashing indicates data activity DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 11 The SFA10000 System Hardware 12 7 Uninterruptible Power Supplies UPS Each controller within the SFA10000 system is paired with a UPS to provide battery backup power should the AC mains fail The
239. ontroller i Battery Fatal fault h fault where e i controller ID h fatal fault value non zero values indicate fatal fault condition 0x0000 NO FAULT 0x0001 BATTERY TEMPERATURE 0x0002 CELL DETERIORATION 0x0004 SMBUS COMMUNICATIONS 0x0008 CHARGE FET CONTROL 0x0010 DISCHARGE FET CONTROL 0x0020 BATTERY VOLTAGE READING 0X0040 LOW CAPACITY Charger ON No Controller i Battery Charge ON x mV y mA Charge mode z Temp t C report where i controller ID x charge voltage in mV e y charge current in mA z charge mode where 1 Normal and 2 Degraded x battery temperature in Celsius Charger OFF No Controller i Battery Charge OFF Charge Complete in t sec with report Capacity z Temp T Cycle Count y where i controller ID e t total charge time in seconds x battery capacity in T battery temperature in Celsius x number of charge discharge cycles has experienced 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 148 UPS Maintenance 5 End of Life Warning When the controller starts up the battery manufacturing date is checked against the current time and the expected battery life A battery end of life warning will be issued as the battery reaches the specified dates e Ifthe battery life remaining is between 0 and 30 days it will log a warning 000483 2011 10 12 12 53 47 8178400 G 62 S 1 T 1 RP 0 VP 01 LOG ES BATTERY END OF LIFE NEAR ES
240. orage pools 3 2 1 Disk Information To display the list of all the disks installed in the system enter the command Figure 72 SHOW PHYSICAL DISK Figure 72 Show Physical Disk List Example Screen DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 56 96 00259 001 kok Physical Disks RII A RII ROI IR EE Health Encl Slot Vendor Product ID Type Cap GB RPM Revision Serial Number Pool State Idx State WWN 1 1 SEAGATE ST3200044458 SAS 1863 7 2K 0006 9WMODRNO0000C0331WFJ 0 GOOD 139 NORM 5000c50010444e40 1 2 SEAGATE T32000444SS SAS 1863 7 2K 0006 9WMOHBM10000C034D008 0 GOOD 138 NORM 5000c500104a1370 1 3 SEAGATE 7T32000444SS SAS 1863 7 2K 0006 9WM0FY4G0000C0372EJE 0 GOOD 128 NORM 5000c50020c7c8 0 i 4 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO43HWO000C0283GKU UNAS GOOD 190 READY 5000c500103939fc 1 5 SEAGATE 1T32000444SS SAS 1863 7 2K 0006 9WMOJVDG0000C032G0Q1 0 GOOD 180 NORM 5000c50020c43740 1 6 SEAGATE T32000444SS SAS 1863 7 2K 0006 9WM0JZ510000C034CXFP 0 GOOD 177 NORM 5000c50020c40f5c 1 7 SEAGATE T31000424sSS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK08SGR0000C035AQKO UNAS GOOD 199 READY 5000c50020cb02a4 1 8 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK06ACNO000C034A5STG UNAS GOOD 174 READY 5000c500104ec228 1 9 SEAGATE S T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WK06BMRO000C032G0VJ UNAS GOOD 192 READY 5000c500104f 9d84 1 10 SEAGATE T31000424SS SAS 931 7 2K 0006 9WKO7KJ20000C032B05W 2 GOOD 130 NORM 5000c50020caf5e0 1 11 SEAGATE ST3100042
241. ors Host attributes are OS operating system of which you can select GENERIC CUSTOM DEFAULT WINDOWS LINUX MAC OS BLUEARC NASSCALER or MS CLUSTER The OS attribute dictates the way the controller responds to certain Fibre Channel commands where appropriate For example Mac OS X expects a different response from an inquiry of LUNO the controller LUN than a Windows host Initiator An initiator is a persistent logical object associated with a host that represents a FCP or SRP initiator port on a host s HBA e Channel A Channel is one of the Fibre Channel or InfiniBand ports on the controller Channel attributes are MODE of which you can select STANDARD SGI MAC_OS or BLUEARC When MAC_OS is selected the port s node name will be set differently in order to be visible to a Macintosh system e Stack A Stack is the input side of the subsystem In the case of the SFA10000 the stack is defined as the Fibre Channel interface In future versions of the product different interface stacks may exist Presentation A Presentation is the relationship between a Host and a virtual disk A Presentation implies that the related Host has some sort of access to the virtual disk Attributes of a Presentation are PORT from which the host will see the virtual disk READ_ONLY controls read only access PRESENT_HOME_ONLY presents the specified virtual disk from its designated home controller only LUN user specified LUN number that th
242. ost attributes are OS operating system of which you can select CUSTOM GENERIC DEFAULT WINDOWS LINUX MAC OS BLUEARC NASSCALER or MS CLUSTER The OS attribute dictates the way the controller responds to certain Fibre Channel commands where appropriate For example Mac OS X expects a different response from an inquiry of LUNO the controller LUN than a Windows host Initiator An initiator is a persistent logical object associated with a host that represents a FCP or SRP initiator port on a host s HBA e Channel A Channel is one of the Fibre Channel or InfiniBand ports on the controller Channel attributes are MODE of which you can select either STANDARD MAC_OS SGI or BLUEARC When MAC_OS is selected the port s node name will be set differently in order to be visible to a Macintosh system e Stack The Application Stack is a layer of the SFA OS that provides services external to the SFA appliance through the use of virtual disks Stack settings apply globally to all channel initiator and other application settings Presentation A Presentation is the relationship between a Host and a virtual disk A Presentation implies that the related Host has some sort of access to the virtual disk Attributes of a Presentation are PORT from which the host will see the virtual disk READ_ONLY controls read only access PRESENT_HOME_ONLY presents the specified virtual disk from its designated home controller only LUN user spec
243. pdate from the Network This method requires a SFTP or SCP client and involves two steps copying the firmware image to both controllers and launching the update 1 Copy the new firmware to the controller using an scp or sftp client You must use an application that supports SFTP or SCP WinSCP a free SFTP and SCP client is used in this example 2 Launch WinSCP or other SFTP SCP client For hostname use the IP address of your controller user name is firmware and password is Firmware Both user name and password are case sensitive 3 Select Login At the login screen Figure 167 use the user name admin with the password password to login to the system User name and passwords are case sensitive Figure 167 Login Screen WinSCP Login Session Session Stored sessions Host name Port number Encore 10 32 31 249 2s Directories SSH User name Password Preferences firmware seceeeee Private key file Protocol File protocol SFTP v Allow SCP fallback Select color Advanced options About Languages Login Save Close 4 Find the image file and drag this to the destination window and select copy Copy operation commences To launch the update 1 Login to the controller via an SSH session with the user name user and password user 2 At the CLI prompt enter update firmware controller lt controller id gt FILE lt file specification gt For example update firmware con
244. pes of storage to be aggregated into a single logical storage resource from which virtual volumes virtual disks can be served up to multi vendor host computers The networked storage pools will provide the framework to manage the growth in storage demand from web based applications database growth network data intensive applications and disaster tolerance capabilities 3 3 1 Display Storage Pool Information You can add and remove storage pools without affecting system operations Use the SHOW POOL command to display the current list of storage pools Figure 75 Figure 75 Show Storage Pool List Example Screen TR KR KK kkk Pool s kaker Total Free Max Disk Global Spare Idx Name State Chunk Raid Faults cap GB cap GB VD GB Settings Jobs T O spare pool Policy 0 pool 0 NORMAL 128 6 720 0 0 DWMRFI 1 UNASSIGNED AUTO 1 pool 1 NORMAL 128 6 720 0 0 DWMRFI 1 UNASSIGNED AUTO 2 pool 2 NORMAL 128 6 720 0 0 DWMRFI 1 UNASSIGNED AUTO Total Storage Pools 3 If the State field shows FLT the Faults field should be investigated The Faults field shows the type of fault condition e C Critical fault condition e A Auto write locked condition e F Forced write through e I Initialization failed pool needs to be deleted NOTE If you issue the command SHOW POOLS and the pools indicate there is a fault check the details of the pool The pool will go into write thru state on initial start
245. ping simpler for the user lt os type gt is the mode which can be set to characteristics specific to an Operating System especially for Mac OSX The supported OS types are BOS Bluearc operating system NASSCALER Used for NAS Scaler solution This fixes the EUI field in Mode Page 0x83 and 0x88 and allows Persistent Group Reservations MS_CLUSTER Used for Microsoft Windows Clsuters It allows Persistent Group Reservations CUSTOM Custom host operating system mode defined by the user DEFAULT Default host operating system mode inherited from the stack object GENERIC Generic host operating system LINUX Linux host operating system MAC_OS Macintosh host operating system WINDOWS Windows host operating system Use the APPLICATION CREATE HOST command to create more hosts as needed If you need to delete a host use the APPLICATION DELETE HOST lt host id gt command To display the current settings enter the command APP SHOW HOST Figure 62 Create Host Examples RAIDS app create host name serverl portl ostype linux HOST 0 OID 0x18d0000 creation STATUS Success 0x0 RAIDS app create host name serverl port2 ostype linux HOST 1 OID 0x18e0001 creation STATUS Success 0x0 RAIDS app show host Stack Host Mode Attributes Index Host Name Index OS Type Characteristics 00000 serverl portl 00000 LINUX 0x000000000000001 00001 serverl port2 00001 LINUX 0x000000000000001 Total Hosts 2 nnn 96 00259 001 Da
246. play the status information of the temperature sensors RAID 1 show temp TR KK RK RK RR KK KKK Temperature Sensor s E kr skr skr aske sr skr sr skr sr ar arr ar re Over Temp Indicators Idx Enc1 Pos Temp C Present Warning Failure Failure Locate Location SES Status 1 3 1 23 TRUE FALSE FALSE OFF OFF PCMA OK 2 3 2 25 TRUE FALSE FALSE OFF OFF PCMB OK Sensors 3 3 3 26 TRUE FALSE FALSE OFF OFF IOMA OK inside 4 3 4 27 TRUE FALSE FALSE OFF OFF IOMB OK 557000 5 3 5 19 TRUE FALSE FALSE OFF OFF BsBoardl1 OK 6 3 6 19 TRUE FALSE FALSE OFF OFF BsBoard2 OK 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 192 Temperature Sensor Locations G 4 SS2460 Disk Enclosure The SS2460 enclosure contains 6 temperature sensors located throughout the enclosure One temperature sensor is located at the inlet of each power cooling module There are two temperature sensors on the back of the midplane Each ambient temperature sensor is connected to an independent C bus for redundancy There is one temperature sensor on each I O module measuring the inlet air temperature to the I O module Figure 217 shows the position of these temperature sensors within the SS2460 Figure 217 Temperature Sensor Positions within SS2460 Midplane 2 Power amp Cooling Module 24 Disk Drive 2 1 0 Module a V Back of Midplane y Temperature Sensors MP RIGHT amp MP LEFT The SHOW TEMP comm
247. ple Screen KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Virtual Disk s KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Index 0 OID 0x8c7b0000 Name vd 0_0 Pool Index 0 Pool OID 0x1c790000 LD OID 0x0dd00000 Capacity 16 GB Offset 0x0 State READY Raid Level RAID6 O ROUTING TRUE WBC TRUE MIRRORED TRUE nitializing FALSE Paused FALSE AutoWriteLock FALSE Critical FALSE Forced Write thru FALSE Current Home 0x38000000 0x00000000 REMOTE Future Home Oxffffffff 0x00000000 LOCAL Preferred Home 0x38000000 0x00000000 REMOTE Job OID INACTIVE UUID 60001 08025a000000000008c7b0000 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 44 Configuring the SFA10000 2711 Create and Assign Spare Pools The SFA10000 supports the concept of spare pools spare pool contains physical disks that can be used as spare disks in one or more storage pools In the event of disk failure a disk that is assigned to a spare pool is automatically swapped into the storage pool to replace the failed disk A rebuild then occurs immediately reducing the possibility of data loss due to additional disk failures Spare pools can be shared by storage pools or dedicated to a particular storage pool in which case the spare disks will only be used by the designated storage pool After a spare pool is created you will need to select disk s from the Unassigned Pool and assign it to the spare pool Follow these steps to create a spare po
248. program non free The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow TERMS AND CONDITIONS 0 Definitions This License refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License Copyright also means copyright like laws that apply to other kinds of works such as semiconductor masks The Program refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License Each licensee is addressed as you Licensees and recipients may be individuals or organizations To modify a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission other than the making of an exact copy The resulting work is called a modified version of the earlier work or a work based on the earlier work A covered work means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program To propagate a work means to do anything with it that without permission would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy Propagation includes copying distribution with or without modification making available to the public and in some countries other activities as well 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide iv Important Information To convey a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies Mere interaction with a user
249. r Component Failures 5 7 1 Replacing a Power Supply Module If a controller power supply fails the Enclosure Fault LED on the front panel will turn amber and the green LED on the failed power supply will be off You can also determine if a power supply has failed using the CLUI command SHOW POWER The position of the failed power supply should match the label PSU1 or PSU2 on the back of the controller If the power supply has failed you must replace it Once you remove it you must replace it within 5 minutes to prevent the system from over heating NOTE Obtain a replacement module of the same type before removing any faulty module Follow these steps to replace a power supply module 1 Identify the failed power supply 2 Disconnect its power cord 3 Loosen the module s thumbscrew and then slide the module out of the bay Figure 182 Figure 182 Controller Power Supply Module Removal Power Supply 1 4 Slide the replacement module into the bay making sure that it is fully inserted 5 Tighten the thumbscrew to secure it 6 Connect the power cord 7 Verify that the Status LED is green indicating that the module is operating normally 8 Verify that the Enclosure Fault LED on the front panel is no longer amber 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 159 Controller Component Failures 5 7 2 Replacing a Fan Module If there is any problem with the fan module the Enc
250. r any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors All other non permissive additional terms are considered further restrictions within the meaning of section 10 If the Program as you received it or any part of it contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction you may remove that term If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section you must place in the relevant source files a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms Additional terms permissive or non permissive may be stated in the form of a separately written license or stated as exceptions the above requirements apply either way 8 Termination 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide vii Important Information You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License including any patent licenses granted under the
251. r cable prior to removing the module from the enclosure e Do not remove a faulty power supply or fan module unless you have a replacement module of the correct type ready for insertion e The power connection must always be disconnected prior to removal of the power supply module from the SFA10000 or disk enclosures e A safe electrical earth connection must be provided to the power cord e Provide a suitable power source with electrical overload protection to meet the requirements given in the technical specifications Do not remove covers from the power supply module Danger of electric shock inside Return the module to your supplier for repair Warning Operation of the SFA10000 with ANY modules missing will disrupt the airflow and the components will not receive sufficient cooling It is Warning ESSENTIAL that all apertures are filled before operating the unit Recycling of Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE At the end of the product s life all scrap waste electrical and electronic equipment should be recycled in accordance with National regulations applicable to the handling of hazardous toxic electrical and electronic waste materials NOTE Observe all applicable safety precautions such as weight restrictions handling batteries and lasers etc detailed in the preceding paragraphs when dismantling and disposing of this equipment ESD Precautions CAUTION When handling the SFA1
252. re NOTE This replacement procedure only applies to SS7000 and must be performed without I O from the host systems This procedure describes how to replace a SS7000 disk enclosure and set its zoning configuration 1 Shut down all host I O to the subsystem 2 Shut down both controllers using the command SHUTDOWN SUBSYSTEM 3 Shut down the disk enclosure that needs to be replaced by turning off the power supplies on the enclosure 4 Note down the cabling scheme to the enclosure to be replaced Unplug the cables from the enclosure 5 Remove the enclosure from the rack 6 Install the new enclosure and re connect the cables using the same cabling scheme 7 Remove all the disk modules from the old enclosure and insert them into the new enclosure 8 Turn on the power supplies on the new enclosure 9 Power up the controllers without resuming I O from the host systems This should result in no degradation to the pools since the backend should not see any drives missing 10 Issue the command SET ENCLOSURE lt id gt ZONING CONFIGURATION O 1 use 0 for system with 10 or 20 enclosures 1x60 use 1 for system with 5 enclosures 2x30 11 Shut down both controllers using the command SHUTDOWN SUBSYSTEM 12 Power cycle the new enclosure 13 Restart the subsystem and resume host I O 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 168 Appendices 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000
253. rns green and the Load Segment 1 LED turns yellow Figure 175 indicating a successful power application 9 The controller that has been shut down will restart Verify that its Power indicator turns green Figure 176 If not press the Power button once Verify that the Fault LED on the controller is off 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 153 UPS Maintenance Figure 176 Controller Front Panel LEDs Fault LED O O l CJ Power Button Indicator 10 Initialize the UPS battery life remaining feature a Login to the controller that is connected to the new UPS and issue the command SHOW UPS ALL b If a battery manufacturing date is displayed do nothing more However if the battery manufacturing date and life remaining are not available as shown below proceed to Step c Battery Mfg Date NOT AVAILABLE Battery Life Remaining NOT AVAILABLE c Issue the command CLEAR CONTROLLER LOCAL UPS_HISTORY Then issue the command SHOW UPS ALL and you should see output similar to the following Battery Mfg Date Thu Sep 8 4 10 30 2011 Battery Life Remaining 730 days only be used after receiving a new backup battery or UPS Entering this command at any other time will inadvertently extend the life cycle of a bad unknown battery The CLEAR CONTROLLER UPS HISTORY command should Warning 96 00259 001 D
254. rs Controller 0 Controller 1 Disk Enclosure 1 I O Module A I O Module 020 120 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 29 Cable Connections 2 5 3 Host Connections 2531 SFA10000 Connect the controller host ports shown in Figure 31 either directly to your hosts or to switch that connects your hosts Depending on your SFA10000 model these connections may be Fibre Channel or InfiniBand NOTE Do NOT use the unused Inter Controller Link connectors to connect InfiniBand hosts or switches Figure 31 Host Ports on SFA10000 Controllers V With Fibre Channel Host Ports 1 NOT for t 14 1 RP1 Host r Host Connections Ports r a y L RP 0 _ 2 3101
255. rted S56000 SAS to SAS Yes SATA Multiplexor Yes SAS to SATA Bridge No None SAS only No SS7000 SAS to SAS No SAS to SATA Bridge No None SAS only No SS2460 None No 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 157 Controller Component Failures 5 7 Controller Component Failures The controller s Enclosure Fault LED turns amber when a fan failure a power failure or over temperature condition occurs Figure 181 Figure 181 Controller Enclosure Fault LED Indicator Controller Enclosure Fault LED 0 o BBE OO A single component failure therefore will not shut down the system However in the unlikely event of component failure you can replace the failed component while the SFA10000 is running The replaced component will automatically be returned to service once the component has been installed and booted up immediately If the controller is used with modules missing for more than a few minutes the controller can overheat causing power failure and data Warning oss Such use will invalidate the warranty If the controller is powered up and you remove any module replace it components Avoid contact with backplane components and module 1 Observe all conventional ESD precautions when handling the controller Warning connectors 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 158 Controlle
256. ry is in progress Please allow time for configuration discovery to complete If this condition persists please reboot the system If this condition continues to persist after the reboot please contact customer support MIR_OTHER_JIS_DISCOVERY_IN_PROG Initialized Storage discovery is in progress on other controller Please allow time for configuration discovery to complete If this condition persists please reboot the system If this condition continues to persist after the reboot please contact customer support MIR_NO_BACKEND_DRIVES This controller cannot find any disk modules on the backend Install disk modules on the backend or fix the condition that prevents this controller from finding backend disks Please refer to the installation guidelines for proper setup DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 132 96 00259 001 Manual Intervention Required MIR States MIR_NO_CONFIG A configuration could not be created on the backend disks Fix the condition that prevents this controller from creating a configuration on the backend disks Please refer to the installation guidelines for proper setup MIR_NO_QUORUM No quorum disks could be found within the disk modules on the backend Fix the condition that prevents the quorum disks from being seen This may be caused by the disks never being in the storage array This will normally happen on new system installations Use the CLEAR SUBSYSTEM MIR_STATE command t
257. s NearLine SAS disks or SATA physical disks with a SAS to SATA bridge interposers Figure 25 Five enclosures Figure 26 Ten enclosures Figure 27 Twenty enclosures SFA10000 configuration using SS2460 enclosures Figure 28 Five enclosures containing SAS disks only SFA10000E configurations Figure 29 Five SS6000 disk enclosures Figure 30 Ten SS6000 disk enclosures K Z 05355555 EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 23 Cable Connections Figure 25 Connecting SFA10000 Controllers to 5 x SS6000 Enclosures or 5 x S7000 Enclosures Controller 0 Controller 1 Disk Enclosure 1 I O Module A 1 O Module 002 022 001 122 101 Disk Enclosure 3 I O Module 012 032 011 Disk Enclosure 4 I O Module 010 030 041 Disk Enclosure 5 I O Module 040 042 003 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA100
258. s essential that either the delivery vehicle is equipped with a lift gate or the destination has a loading dock with a lift Once a rack has been removed from the crate it can be rolled to its destination Racks are either 42U or 45U The 42U racks are 81 75 2077 mm tall and the 45U racks are 87 2210 mm tall Both type of racks are 28 712 mm wide and 45 75 1162 mm deep including the front and rear doors Note that the physical disk modules are shipped separately from the disk enclosures The disk modules are packaged in separate boxes that are strapped to pallets These pallets can be moved to the installation site using a pallet jack To Do List 7 Plan the unpacking location where the delivery vehicle will deliver the crate 7 Verify that the route to the installation site does not involve any steps O Verify that any elevator that is part of the route has sufficient door height and load capacity Verify that the size of all the doorways along the delivery route is big enough for the pallet jack with the crate to pass through Verify that there is enough space at the unpacking location to set up the ramps and remove the racks from the crates 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 15 Site Preparation 2 2 2 Rack Location Air Flow and Access The racks that comprise a single SFA10000 storage subsystem must be installed adjacent to one another so that the disk enclosure
259. sion Sub Index Sub OID Enclosure Index 1 0x78000001 1 0x50000001 T OK TRUE OFF OFF IOM1 0078 2 0x78000002 1 0x50000001 2 OK TRUE OFF OFF IOM1 3 0x78000003 1 0x50000001 3 OK TRUE OFF OFF DEM1 TCA 00300 01 A MXSCI00089HVD12B D02 011 D02 011 7 4 0x78000004 1 0x50000001 4 OK TRUE OFF OFF DEM2 TCA 00300 01 A MXSCI00089HVD110 DO2 011 DO2 011 7 5 0x78000005 1 0x50000001 5 OK TRUE OFF OFF DEM3 TCA 00300 01 A MXSCIO0085QVD2CB D02 011 D02 011 7 6 0x78000006 1 0x50000001 6 OK TRUE OFF OFF DEM4 TCA 00300 01 A MXSCIO0086QVD109 DO2 011 DO2 011 7 7 0x78000007 1 0x50000001 7 OK TRUE OFF OFF DEMS TCA 00300 01 A MXSCI000893VD19D DO2 011 DO2 011 7 8 0x78000008 1 Firmware Update DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 142 5 4 4 5 4 4 1 96 00259 001 Enclosure OID Position SES Status Present Predicted Failure Ind Locate Indicator Location Part number Serial number Firmware version Init string version FPGA version Sub Index Sub OID Enclosure Index Enclosure OID Position SES Status Present Predicted Failure Ind Locate Indicator Location Part number Serial number Firmware version Init string version FPGA version Sub Index Sub OID Enclosure Index Enclosure OID Position SES Status Present Predi
260. splay the type of job and the percentage of completion Figure 67 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 50 Configuring the SFA10000 Figure 67 Show Job Example Screen RAID 0 show job all attributes OID 0x2e040001 Index 1 Target POOL 0x1aa00001 Index 1 Sub Target NA Type INITIALIZE State RUNNING Completion Status UNKNOWN Priority 50 Fraction Complete 71 Time NA You may also check if a virtual disk is ready for access using the SHOW VIRTUAL DISK lt id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES command Figure 68 Figure 68 Show Virtual Disk Example Screen RAID 0 show virtual_disk 0 all_attributes OID 0x89ba0000 Name 89ba0000 POOL OID 0x19b40003 Capacity 16384 MBs Offset 0x0 C State READY gt Raidlevel RAIDS IO ROUTING TRUE WBC TRUE MWBC FALSE Initializing FALSE Paused FALSE AutoWriteLock FALSE Data Lost FALSE Present Home Only FALSE Your SFA10000 initial configuration is now complete 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 51 Chapter 3 Administration 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 52 Accessing the SFA10000 3 1 Accessing the SFA10000 The SFA OS provides a set of tools that enable administrators to centrally manage the network storage and resources that handle business critical data NOTE Thecommand descriptions given in this User Guide
261. stallation Procedure 0 cece eee ee eee ees 177 Appendix D SS6000 Disk Maps for SFAT0000E cc cece cece e cece eect eeeeees 178 Appendix E Zoning Configuration Procedure ec ceeecc ects eeeeeeeeee ees 179 E 1 SS6000 Enclosures asasanerennnnanenenenennanenenenennnnenenenener 179 E 2 SS7000 ENnclOSUreSs 4cic4iewdaeteds tewtaieteda E a ae kvint kane 180 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide xxi Table of Contents Appendix F Rack Installation Procedure cece cece cece eect eee eeeeeteeeees 181 F 1 Rackmounting the Controller cc eee eee een eee nett en eee eeees 181 F 2 Rackmounting the UPS Unit cece eee ence ene ene n eee eeee 187 Appendix G Temperature Sensor Locations cccccceec cece eee eeeeeeeeeees 189 G 1 SFA10000 Controller 0 cece cece cece cece eee e eee teen en eeeeeaes 189 G 2 SS6000 Disk Enclosure anananuananenenennnnenenenenennnnenenenenen 191 G 3 SS7000 Disk Enclosure anananuananenenennnnenenenenennnnenenenener 192 G 4 S52460 Disk Enclosure anananunnanenenennnnenenenenennnnenenenenen 193 Appendix hs Termnol gyi r u5r4v44aadgaes R EEVEE ATEREA TANAAN ANREP and 194 NAT E AT E babe E 196 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide xxii Chapter 1 Introduction 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 1
262. t 30 and 0 days of battery life remaining Note that there will be two other events that are logged with these which are logged any time the battery changes state These events should occur on the order of once a year so there should be limited traffic to the event log Note that LOG ES ENCL UPS WARN BATT may occur for other reasons than the battery reached its end of life 000486 2011 11 12 12 54 52 3214473 G 61 S 2 T 1 RP 0 VP 01 LOG ES BATTERY END OF LIFE PASSED ES Controller 0xc2999211d0001 UPS battery at position 1 has reached its end of life 0 days ago and should be replaced immediately 000487 2011 11 12 12 54 52 3214503 G 60 S 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 01 LOG ES ENCL UPS INFO ES UPS for controller 0xc2999211d0001 changed state SES status 2 disabled 0 charge 1 hold up time 2 min 000488 2011 11 12 12 54 52 3214512 G 61 S 1 T 1 RP 0 VP 01 LOG ES ENCL UPS WARN BATT ES UPS for controller 0xc2999211d0001 indicates that its battery should be replaced SES 2 0 0 8 Ne 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 149 UPS Maintenance 5 5 4 Replacing the Battery Pack NOTE Do not disconnect the battery pack while the UPS is in Battery mode CAUTION If there is a power outage while replacing the battery pack the controller without its battery pack will power down However the redundant con
263. t Spare Pool entry shows NONE no spare pool will serve this storage pool Figure 153 Assign Spare Pool to Storage Pool Screen STORAGE POOLS SPARE POOL DRIVE ASSIGN POLICY INDEX POOLNAME RAID STATE SELECTSPAREPOOL SELECTDRIVETYPE SELECTSPINDLESPEED SELECT DRIVE SIZE GB 0 DONT CARE 16 pookts Raps NORMAL spare_poot22 SATA E 7200rem E 186368 47 pookt7 RADS NORMAL Noe E SATA E 7200RPM E 1863 cB 18 pookt8 RAD6 NORMAL NONE J SATA E 7200RPM E 186368 19 pookt9 RAD Noe SATA E 20RPM E 1863 GB 20 pool 20 e Noe 3 SATA 3 7200RPM 186368 Cancer 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 123 Spare Pools 4 8 5 Set Spare Pool Attributes To change the spare pool s attributes select Pools gt Set Spare Pool Attributes At the Set Spare Pool Attributes screen Figure 154 click to select the spare pool whose attributes you want to change Make the desired changes Click UPDATE to save the changes Figure 154 Set Spare Pool Attributes Screen SPARE POOLS SET SPARE POOL ATTRIBUTES STEP 2 SET ATTRIBUTES INDEX SPARE POOL NAME TOTAL MEMBERS DISK TIMEOUT Mins TOTAL RAW CAPACITY GB 3 spare_pool 3 2 10 1808 9 spare_pool 9 3 10 2712 SET SPARE POOL ATTRIBUTES Set attributes for spare_pool 3 spare pool Spare pool name spare pool 3 Disk timeout fio minutes 4 8 6 Delete a Spare Pool In you need to delete a spare po
264. t Windows Clusters It allows Persistent Group Reservations The Custom mode allows for different adjustment requests from OEMs 3 6 6 2 Identifying Host Connections via Ports The host ports of the controller dynamically acknowledge and log in any Host Port WWN connection that it can sync up with When you query the storage subsystem for the discovered initiators the listing you get will be the current set of connections that are logged in If a connection is broken and then re established the re discovered Port Node WWN will be assigned a new host_index number This is inconsequential after a specific Port Node WWN is directly associated with a specific host that is done in a subsequent step Example of discovered initiators RAID app show discovered initiator Initiator Identifier Controller 0 Controller 1 Index Type ID no por RPO RPl RP 0 RP 1 00003 FC 0x010600 0x20000000c9813cc9 0x20000000c9813cc9 3 00005 FC 0x010800 0x20000000c9813cc8 0x20000000c9813cc8 0 00006 0x010900 0x20000000c9813a47 0x20000000c9813a47 2 00011 FC 0x010300 0x2000001b32827e95 0x2000001b32827e95 00012 FC 0x010200 0x2000001b32a27e95 0x2000001b32a27e95 Total FC Initiators 6 FC FC 00007 FC 0x010a00 0x20000000c9813a46 0x20000000c9813a46 FC ae 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 76 Presentations In order to provide an association between a host and a virtual disk you must identif
265. t subject RAID Available keywords ASSIGN Assign raid object CLEAR Clear raid object states CREATE Create raid objects DELETE Delete raid objects ERASE Erase raid objects LOCATE Locate raid objects Mark Mark the event log MOVE_HOME Locate raid objects PAUSE Pause raid objects REPLACE Replace raid objects RESUME Resume raid objects SET Set raid objects SHOW Display raid objects SHUTDOWN Shutdown raid objects SYNCHRONIZE Synchronize raid objects UPDATE_FIRMWARE Update firmware on raid objects VERIFY Start a Verify background job s 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 54 Accessing the SFA10000 3 1 3 1 Basic Key Operations The command line editing and history features support ANSI and VT 100 terminal modes The command history buffer can hold up to 64 commands The full command line editing and history only work on main CLI and SSH sessions when entering new commands Basic Key Assignments are listed in Table 2 Simple not full command line editing only is supported when the e CLUI prompts the user for more information e alternate CLUI prompt is active The alternate CLUI is used on the RS 232 connection during an active SSH session NOTE Notall SSH programs support all the keys listed in Table 2 Table 2 Basic Key Assignments Key ANSI CTRL or Escape Sequence Description Backspace Ctrl H deletes preceding
266. t warrant administrative attention SNMP traps have been implemented to monitor critical and warning events A management information base MIB has also been created to be used to provide inquiry objects and events to the user s monitoring application The provided SNMP traps expose management data on the managed system in the areas of temperature senor fans power supplies pools and physical disks as well as a variety of real time critical and error events Each controller has an SNMP_AGENT When changing the SNMP settings you must set the changes on each controller separately To set the SNMP trap agent on a controller enter the command Figure 112 UI SET SNMP IP ADDRESS lt ip address gt COMMUNITY lt name gt To show all the SNMP trap agent attributes use UI SHOW SNMP command Figure 112 Figure 112 SNMP Configuration Example Screen RAID 0 ui set snmp ip address 192 168 0 10 SNMP Agent set with STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 0 ui set snmp community public SNMP Agent set with STATUS Success 0x0 RAID 0 ui show snmp SNMP Trap Agent Attributes IP_ADDRESS 192 168 0 10 COMMUNITY public Inquiry Items and Events Table 4 Table 5 and Table 6 below detail the additional inquiry items and events that will be trapped in the SNMP MIB and in the Email Agent Table 4 SNMP Inquiry Objects SNMP Inquiry Objects Item Returned Values Temperature Sensor Number of temperature s
267. taDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 48 Configuring the SFA10000 3 Map ahost to a discovered initiator Enter the command Figure 63 APPLICATION IMPORT DISCOVERED INITIATOR lt initiator id gt HOST lt host id gt where lt initiator id gt is the index name of the discovered initiator lt host id gt is the index name of the host Figure 63 Map a Host to a Discovered Initiator RAIDS app import discovered_initiator 6 host 0 INITIATOR 0 OID 0x280f0000 imported from DISCOVERED INITIATOR 6 oid 0X30000006 STATUS Success 0x0 Use the APPLICATION IMPORT command to map the other hosts to the initiators as needed To display the current mappings enter the command Figure 64 APPLICATION SHOW INITIATOR Figure 64 Show Current Imported Initiators RAIDS app show initiator Host Initiator Identifier Index Type Index node port 00000 FC 00000 0x2001001b32aeb280 0x2001001b32aeb280 Total FC Initiators 1 4 Present the virtual disks to the hosts Enter the command Figure 65 APPLICATION CREATE PRESENTATION HOST lt host id gt VIRTUAL DISK lt vd id gt LUN lt LUN id gt where lt host id gt is the index name of the host lt vd id gt is the virtual disk to be presented lt LUN id gt is the LUN that the specified virtual disk will be presented as or use the default value if it is not specified Figure 65 Create a Presentation RAID app create presentation host 0
268. te presentations for that virtual disks If a presentation is configured for a virtual disk deleting the virtual disk will return an error You must first delete all the presentations configured on that virtual disk see Section 3 6 4 Presentation Commands Ay When you delete a virtual disk you lose access to all data that was stored on that virtual disk Warning 3 4 5 Presentation to Hosts not applicable to SFA10000E Virtual disks are only presented to the hosts that have been given authorized access Refer to Section 2 7 12 Present Virtual Disk to External Host not applicable to SFA10000E for detailed instructions on configuring virtual disk presentations to hosts Refer to Section 3 6 Presentations for more information on commands related to presentation 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 68 Spare Pool Management 3 5 Spare Pool Management The SFA10000 supports the concept of spare pools A spare pool contains physical disks that can be used as spare disks Spare pools can be shared by storage pools or dedicated to a particular storage pool in which case the spare disks will only be used by the designated storage pool After a spare pool is created you will need to select disk s from the Unassigned Pool and assign it the spare pool In the event of disk failure a disk that is assigned to a spare pool is automatically swapped into the storage pool to replace the failed dis
269. ted at a distance from the console it is possible to increase the locate dwell time Use the command SET SUBSYSTEM LOCATE DWELL TIME lt time in seconds gt Valid values are 0 to 65535 Figure 90 Show Locate Dwell Time Setting KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKEKK Subsystem EN kr skr sr skr se KKK RP Subsystem Name SFA10000 UID 60001 0800a30000000000030000000 Subsystem Time Tue Oct 18 22 26 39 2011 C Locate Dwell Time 240 seconds Enabled Licenses RAID6 SATASSURE nnn 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 82 Network Time Protocol Mode 3 8 Network Time Protocol Mode NTP Network Time Protocol mode is available on the SFA10000 It provides a means for the controllers to synchronize their time across a network usually within a small number of milliseconds over a long period of time You can enter up to four NTP addresses as the time servers To enable the NTP mode enter the command SET SUBSYSTEM NTP lt ip address list up to 4 gt NONE Examples SET SUBSYSTEM NTP 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 5 3 4 5 6 6 5 7 8 SET SUBSYSTEM NTP 1 2 3 4 SET SUBSYSTEM NTP NONE Specifying a list of NTP addresses will start the NTP mode on each controller using that list of NTP addresses as the time servers Specifying NONE will turn off NTP mode To display the current settings enter the command Figure 91 SHOW SUBSYSTEM ALL ATTRIBUTES Figure 91 Show NTP Settings RAID 0 show subsystem all KKKKK
270. ted with this IOM Follow the cable connected to this IOM back to the associated SFA controller Each of the cables is labeled with a 3 digit number that has the form 0xx or 1xx All of the cables with labels beginning with 0 go to one controller and all of those beginning with 1 go to the other controller In cases where more than one SFA10000 is installed in a set of racks each couplet reuses the same cable labels so be careful not to confuse couplets 5 Determine the index of the associated controller Use the LOCATE CONTROLLER lt id gt command to flash the blue Locate LED on the front panel 6 Shut down the associated controller Enter the SHUTDOWN CONTROLLER lt id gt command where lt id gt is the index of the controller which was determined in Step 5 This will cause all pools to fail over to the other controller 7 Physically replace the failing DEM 8 Restart the controller that was shut down Press the Power button on the controller s UPS Allow the controller to start Eventually the pools will fail back to the controller that was shut down 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 166 Disk Enclosure Component Failures 5 8 3 SAS Cable Replacement The following procedure describes how to replace reseat or swap a failing cable 1 Physically locate the cable that needs to be replaced This is usually done by physically inspecting the cables or by noting that one of the gre
271. th controllers promiscuous mode select ALL HOSTS instead of individual hosts NOTE The promiscuous mode may not be used with persistent reservations The ALL HOSTS setting will cause SCSI2 3 Reservation commands to fail 3 Then select the mask options and enter the Logical Unit Number LUN 4 Click CREATE PRESENTATION The newly created presentation is displayed 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 127 4 10 4 10 1 4 10 2 Enclosures Menu Enclosures Menu Figure 161 shows the Enclosures pull down menu These functions provide status information on the hardware components within the enclosures Figure 161 Enclosure Menu Enclosures Locate Enclosure Show Cooling Elements Show Disk Slots Show Enclosures Show Expanders Show Power Supply Show Temperature Sensors Show UPS Update Enclosure Firmware Show Enclosures The Show Enclosures function displays all the controllers and disk enclosures that are installed in the SFA10000 system Figure 162 Clicking on the highlighted item will bring up the detailed information of that component Figure 162 Show Enclosures Screen ENCLOSURE SHOW ALL ENCLOSURES ENCLOSURE type LOGICALID REVISION VENDOR PRODUCT DISK POWER COOLING TEMP EXPANDER UPS ID LEVEL IDENTIFICATION IDENTIFIER SLOT SUPPLY ELEMENT SENSOR oO CONTROLLER 0x1ff08032f0000 0000 DDN SFA10000 info info info info a D
272. the command APPLICATION DELETE INITIATOR lt initiator id gt 3 6 3 Host Commands To create a host use the command APPLICATION CREATE HOST OSTYPE BOS NASSCALER MS CLUSTER CUSTOM DEFAULT GENERIC LINUX MAC OS WINDOWS To delete the specified host use the command APPLICATION DELETE HOST lt host id gt To display the presentation associated with the specified application host use the command APPLICATION SHOW HOST lt host id gt PRESENTATIONS To display the initiators associated with the specified application host use the command APPLICATION SHOW HOST lt host id gt INITIATORS 3 6 4 Presentation Commands To present a virtual disk to the specified host use the command APPLICATION CREATE PRESENTATION HOST lt host id gt VIRTUAL DISK lt vd id gt LUN lt LUN id gt To delete a presentation use the command APPLICATION DELETE PRESENTATION HOST lt host id gt VIRTUAL DISK lt vd id gt FORCE Note the optional parameter of FORCE deletes without confirmation The wildcard deletes all presentations To set the specified attribute to the specified value use the command APPLICATION SET PRESENTATION lt object id gt lt attribute name gt lt value gt Attributes are ENABLE ALL NONE lt channel id gt where the channel id is the object id of an Enabled Client Channel Channel 0 is CORPO Channel 1 is CORP1 These are the two RAID processors on Controller 0 Channel 2 is C1RPO Channel 3 is C1RP1 These
273. the command SET POOL lt id gt REBUILD FULL POLICY lt priority gt where lt priority gt is an integer in the range of 1 to 99 The default value specifies a priority of 80 Figure 101 Set Full Rebuild Priority RAID 0 set pool 3 rebuild full policy 70 POOL 3 OID 0x19b40003 attributes set with STATUS Success 0x0 Fractional Rebuild Priority To change the fractional rebuild priority value Figure 102 enter the command SET POOL lt id gt REBUILD FRACTIONAL POLICY lt priority gt where lt priority gt is an integer in the range of 1 to 99 The default value specifies a priority of 90 Figure 102 Set Fractional Rebuild Priority RAID 0 set pool 3 rebuild fractional policy 80 POOL 3 OID 0x19b40003 attributes set with STATUS Success 0x0 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 92 The System Logs 3 12 The System Logs 3 12 1 Displaying Event Logs To display the event log starting at the start sequence number in ascending sequence number order Figure 103 enter command SHOW CONTROLLER lt id gt LOG ASCEND Figure 103 Show Controller Log Example Screen 1 RAID 0 show controller 0 log ascend 000001 2011 10 04 01 03 26 6418393 G 0 S 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG ES UPS CLIENT ATTRIBUTE NAME ES Controller enclosure 0x1f 0800a30000 UPS attribute 0 000002 2011 10 04 01 03 26 6418400 G 0 S 0 T 1 RP 0 VP 1 LOG ES UPS CLIENT ATTRIBUTE CHANGED
274. the specified controller will blink LOCATE ENCLOSURE lt id gt The blue Identify LED on the specified enclosure will blink LOCATE EXPANDER lt enclosure id gt The handle rib of the specified expander will lt expander id gt blink blue LOCATE FAN lt enclosure id gt lt fan id gt The blue Identify LED on the specified fan module will blink LOCATE PHYSICAL DISK lt id gt The Status Identify LED of the specified disk module will blink LOCATE POOL lt id gt The Status Identify LED of the disk modules in the specified storage pool will blink LOCATE POWER SUPPLY lt enclosure id gt The blue Identify LED on the specified lt power supply id gt module will blink LOCATE SPARE POOL lt id gt The Status Identify LED of the disk modules in the specified spare pool will blink LOCATE UNASSIGNED POOL The Status Identify LED of the disk modules that are unassigned will blink LOCATE UNASSIGNED POOL FAILED The Status Identify LED of the disk modules that have failed will blink LOCATE UPS lt enclosure id gt lt UPS id gt The blue Locate LED on the controller that is connected to the specified UPS will blink 3 7 1 Locate Dwell Time The duration of the identify LED blink period is configurable By default the duration is 2 minutes To verify the current locate dwell time enter the command SHOW SUBSYSTEM ALL Figure 90 If more time is needed in cases where the subsystem is physically loca
275. thru mode until the issue is resolved For example CLUI unable to get RAID SUBSYSTE 0x30003 8 M NA E STATUS MIR Firmware Version Mismatch NOTE The firmware will be in MIR firmware version mismatch state for the first controller that is upgraded You must ensure that you have a CLUI prompt from the newly upgraded controller before moving to Step 4 Upgrade the second controller by repeating Steps 2 3 above on the other controller Initialize the UPS battery life remaining feature a Issue the command SHOW UPS ALL b Ifa battery manufacturing date is displayed do nothing more However if the battery manufacturing date and life remaining are not available as shown below proceed to Step c Battery Mfg Date NOT AVAILABLE Battery Life Remaining NOT AVAILABLE i Dy c Issue the command CLEAR CONTROLLER lt id gt UPS_HISTORY Then issue the command SHOW UPS ALL and you should see output similar to the following DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 136 5 4 2 2 96 00259 001 Firmware Update Battery Mfg Date Thu Sep 8 4 10 30 2011 Battery Life Remaining 730 days only be used after receiving a new backup battery or controller Entering this command at any other time will inadvertently extend the life cycle of a bad unknown battery The CLEAR CONTROLLER UPS HISTORY command should Warning Windows Environment Firmware U
276. tion failure LOG ES BATTERY FAILURE PREDICTED UPS for the controller is predicted to fail and should be replaced LOG ES COOLING ELEMENT INSERTED A fan located in the power supply has been inserted LOG ES COOLING ELEMENT NORMAL A fan located in the power supply has returned to normal status LOG ES COOLING ELEMENT REMOVED A fan located in the power supply has been removed LOG ES COOLING ELEMENT WARNING Enclosure cooling element has reported a warning condition LOG_ES_DISK_SLOT_ELEMENT_INSERTED A device has been inserted into a disk slot LOG_ES_DISK_SLOT_ELEMENT_REMOVED A device has been removed from a disk slot LOG_ES_ENCL_UPS_WARN_AC UPS for the controller has started with no AC power LOG_ES_EXPANDER_ELEMENT_INSERTED A DEM or an I O module has been inserted LOG_ES_EXPANDER_ELEMENT_NORMAL The enclosure expander element has reported a warning condition LOG_ES_EXPANDER_ELEMENT_REMOVED A DEM or an I O module has been removed LOG_ES_EXPANDER_ELEMENT_WARNING The DEM reports normal LOG_ES_POWER_SUPPLY_INSERTED A power supply has been inserted LOG_ES_POWER_SUPPLY_NORMAL The power supply has returned to a normal status LOG_ES_POWER_SUPPLY_REMOVED A power supply has been removed LOG_ES_POWER_SUPPLY_WARNING Power supply for the controller issued warning LOG_ES_TEMPERATURE_SENSOR_INSERTED A
277. tions Home Background Idx Name State Pool Raid Cap GB Settings Jobs Current Preferred Job 0 vd 0 0 FAILED 0 5 8 WMI 1 L 0 1 L 0 INACTIVE 1 vd 10 FAILED 0 5 8 WMI 1 L 0 1 L 0 INACTIVE 2 vd 2 0 FAILED 0 5 8 WMI 1 L 0 1 L 0 INACTIVE 3 vd 31 READY 1 5 8 WMI 1 L 0 1 L 0 INACTIVE 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 64 Storage Pool Management e SHOW VD 3 ALL command under failed initialization conditions Index 0 OID 0x8a680000 Name vd 0 0 Pool Index Oo 7 Pool OID 0x1a520000 Capacity 472 GB Offset 0x0 State FAILED INITIALIZATION Raidlevel RAID6 IO ROUTING TRUE WBC TRUE MIRRORED TRUE Initializing FAILED Paused FALSE AutoWriteLock FALSE 336 Naming a Storage Pool The SET POOL lt pool id gt NAME lt name gt command lets you specify a name to identify the storage pool Figure 80 Figure 80 Set Pool Name Example Screen RAID 0 set pool 0 name RAID 5 Set POOL 0 OID 0x19b40000 attributes set with STATUS Success 0x0 337 Deleting a Storage Pool The DELETE POOL lt id gt command deletes the specified storage pool from the system The DELETE POOL command erases all the data on the storage pool You cannot delete a storage pool if there are virtual disks still present on the Warning pool 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 65 Virtual Disk Management 3 4 Virtual Disk Manag
278. to minimize their impact on system performance To set the job priority select Subsystem gt Set Background Jobs The Set Background Jobs screen Figure 120 displays the list of current jobs Select the job and the screen changes accordingly Make the desired changes and click UPDATE to save Figure 120 Set Background Job Screen SUBSYSTEM SET BACKGROUND JOB STATE BACKGROUND JOB WE STATE TARGET COMPLETION STATUS PRIORITY FRACTION COMPLETED 0x2d830010 POOL VERIFY RUNNING 0x1db50010 70 7 0x2d810011 POOL VERIFY RUNNING 0x1db70011 70 7 0x2e030012 POOL VERIFY ONCE RUNNING 0x1db90012 70 14 0x2d810013 POOL VERIFY RUNNING 0x1dbb0013 70 7 0x2e020014 POOL VERIFY ONCE RUNNING 0x1dbd0014 70 14 SET BACKGROUND ATTRIBUTES FOR 0x2 SET BACKGROUND C pause Resume JOB STATE S pemomme Po eae 4 2 5 Email and Critical Event Notification Setup Emails will be sent automatically as notification of a selected group of warning and error events that have occurred on the SFA10000 The recipient address is user configurable and only one address is permitted per system To set up or change the email address Select Subsystem gt Update Email Settings The upper portion of the Update Email Settings screen Figure 121 will display the current settings if any 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 106 Subsystem Menu Figure 121 Update Email Settings Screen CONTROLLERS UPDATE EMAIL SET
279. troller LOCAL FILE ddn flash 2812 opt tgz NOTE The quotes around the filename of the firmware image are required DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 137 Firmware Update 3 Upon completion of reboot login and enter the command SHOW CONTROLLER LOCAL ALL Verify that the firmware version is correct NOTE The pools may indicate there is a fault Issue the command SHOW POOLS to check the details of the pool The pools will go into write thru state on initial startup to allow the batteries the opportunity to charge The write thru mode is necessary to allow for data integrity until battery redundancy on each controller is completed If there is a battery issue the system will indicate replacement is required and all VDs will remain in write thru mode until the issue is resolved For example CLUI unable to get RAID SUBSYSTEM NAME STATUS MIR Firmware Version Mismatch 0x30003 8 NOTE The firmware will be in MIR firmware version mismatch state for the first controller that is upgraded You must ensure that you have a CLUI prompt from the newly upgraded controller before moving to Step 4 4 Upgrade the firmware on the second controller by repeating Steps 1 to 3 above on the other controller 5 Initialize the UPS battery life remaining feature a Issue the command SHOW UPS ALL b Ifa battery manufacturing date is displayed do nothing more However if t
280. troller insures that no operations are lost or corrupted For this reason when you change the battery pack on one controller let it charge completely before changing the battery pack on the other controller With the hot swappable battery feature the UPS battery packs can be replaced without turning the UPS off or disconnecting the load Note that the battery packs are the FRU not the batteries If you prefer to shut down the UPS to change the battery pack use the CLUI to issue a SHUTDOWN CONTROLLER lt id gt command to the corresponding controller This will cause an orderly controller shutdown which concludes by automatically turning off the UPS power WARNING Batteries can present a risk of electrical shock or burn from high short circuit current The following precautions should be observed 1 Remove watches rings or other metal objects 2 Use tools with insulated handles 3 Do not lay tools or metal parts on top of batteries ELECTRIC ENERGY HAZARD Do not attempt to alter any battery pack wiring or connectors Attempting to alter wiring can cause injury Replace the battery pack with the same type of battery pack as originally installed in the UPS Perform the following steps to replace the battery pack NOTE Replace the battery pack every 24 months even if it is still functioning 1 Remove the UPS bezel by loosening the right side and then tapping the right side to disengage the left side Figure 169
281. tworks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide x Important Information THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE SOFTWARE PROVIDED HEREUNDER IS ON AN AS IS BASIS AND THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA HAS NO OBLIGATION TO PROVIDE MAINTENANCE SUPPORT UPDATES ENHANCEMENTS OR MODIFICATIONS Copyright C 2004 2005 2006 Board of Trustees Leland Stanford Jr University All rights reserved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF O
282. ue to a degraded condition such as insufficient battery backup e FAILED The VD is failed due to an initialization failure The Settings field displays the current optional settings for the virtual disk e W Write back caching enabled e M Mirrored cache data enabled e I TO routing enabled this is not user configurable The Jobs field displays the current active background jobs on the virtual disk e I Initializing active e P Current job is paused The Home field shows which controller processor is the current and preferred homes of the VD in the format of a b c where e a controller e b Local Remote controller e c processor on the controller 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 66 3 4 2 3 4 3 Virtual Disk Management The SHOW VIRTUAL DISK lt id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES command displays the detailed information of the specified virtual disk Figure 82 Figure 82 Show Virtual Disk Attributes Example Screen Virtual Disk s Index OID Name Pool Index Pool OID LD OID Capacity Offset State Raidlevel IO ROUTING WBC MIRRORED Initializing Paused AutoWriteLock Critical Forced Write thru Current Home Future Home Preferred Home Job OID UUID Total Virtual Disks TR RK RR KK KK KK TEAK RK RR KK 0 0x8a680000 vd 0_0 o 0x1a520000 0x0dd00000 472 GB 0x0 READY RAID6 TRUE TRUE TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE
283. ule out of the bay Figure 184 Controller Internal Disk Module Replacement l TOO OO OOOO OR ee SOOO OOO 9 Handle Release Button Slide the new module into the Close the handle and push the latched bay making sure that it is fully inserted handle until it clicks indicating that the handle is DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 161 Controller Component Failures 5 7 4 Replacing a Controller If during the course of an SFA10000 problem determination authorized support channels determine that a controller is faulty and must be replaced use the procedure below to perform a controller replacement 1 Secure a copy of the firmware file of currently installed SFA OS firmware version It is best practice to obtain the firmware image file matching the currently installed version on the controller to be replaced Firmware images can be requested from DDN Technical Support 2 Verify the physical location of the controller to be replaced If the controller to be replaced is responsive to CLUI commands login to the controller via ssh andrunthe command LOCATE CONTROLLER LOCAL This will blink the Identify LED on the controller Figure 185 NOTE If the controller is unresponsive guidance from DDN Technical Support should be sought Figure 185 Identify LED on Controller Identify LED Power LED C 10 O OD Go CI CJ OC The duration of t
284. up to allow the batteries the opportunity to charge The write thru mode is necessary to allow for data integrity until battery redundancy on each controller is completed If there is a battery issue the system will indicate replacement is required and all VDs will remain in write thru mode until the issue is resolved The Settings field displays the current optional settings for the storage pool e P SATAssure Parity on Check enabled e D SATAssure Data Integrity Field enabled e W Write back caching enabled e M Mirrored cache data enabled e R Read ahead caching enabled Re Real time Adaptive Cache Technology enabled e I TO routing enabled this is not user configurable e V Pool verify enabled 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 59 Storage Pool Management The Jobs field displays the current active background jobs on the storage pool I Initializing active R Rebuilding active V Pool verifying active P Current job is paused The SHOW POOL lt id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES command displays the detailed information of the specified storage pool Figure 76 Figure 76 Show Storage Pool Attributes Example Screen krakk as skr sr ar ae Pool s i KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Index 0 OID 0x1c790000 Type STORAGE ame pool 0 Chunk Size 128KB 0x100 blocks Block Size 512 RAID Type RAID6 Free Raid6 Capacity 0 GB Max VD Size 0 GB Total Capacity 16416 GB UUID 60
285. upport ddn com Technical Support is available Monday through Friday After hours support is available to those customers that have a Service Contract Please contact our sales representatives for more information You can find us on the World Wide Web at www ddn com You can contact our Customer Service by Telephone at 1 818 700 6052 Internet email at customerservice ddn com Our Corporate Headquarters is located at 9351 Deering Avenue Chatsworth California 91311 1 800 TERABYTE 1 800 837 2298 Product Shipping Instructions If you are shipping the product to another location always use the original packaging provided with your unit s If you are sending a product to DataDirect Networks for warranty or out of warranty repair you must obtain a Return of Materials Authorization RMA number from DataDirect Networks Technical Support 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 199 9351 Deering Avenue Chatsworth CA 91311 www ddn com 1 800 TERABYTE
286. ure Index Enclosure OID Position SES Status Present Predicted Failure Ind Locate Indicator Location Firmware version Sub Index Sub OID Enclosure Index Enclosure OID Position SES Status Present Predicted Failure Ind Locate Indicator Location Sub Index Sub OID Enclosure Index Enclosure OID Position SES Status Present Predicted Failure Ind Locate Indicator Location Part number Serial number Firmware version Init string version FPGA version Sub Index Sub OID Enclosure Index Enclosure OID Position SES Status Present Predicted Failure Ind Locate Indicator Location Part number Serial number Firmware version Init string version FPGA version Sub Index Sub OID Enclosure Index Enclosure OID Position SES Status Present Predicted Failure Ind Locate Indicator Location Part number Serial number Firmware version Init string version FPGA version Sub Index Sub OID Enclosure Index Enclosure OID Position SES Status Present Predicted Failure Ind Locate Indicator Location Part number Serial number Firmware version Init string version FPGA version Sub Index Sub OID Enclosure Index Enclosure OID Position SES Status Present Predicted Failure Ind Locate Indicator Location Part number Serial number Firmware version Init string version FPGA ver
287. ure must only be done without I O being handled by the subsystem The disk enclosures must be zoned correctly The zoning configuration is determined by the piano switches located behind the front bezel of the enclosure Follow these steps to verify the zoning configuration on each disk enclosure 1 Slide the enclosure out from the rack by squeezing the tabs on both rack slides Keep pulling until the enclosure locks and you hear a clicking sound 2 Remove the front bezel by removing the four screws Figure 195 Figure 195 Removing S56000 Front Bezel 3 Once the front bezel is removed it is possible to see the piano switches through the grey bezel Figure 196 If the switches are hidden by a Mylar switch cover remove the cover with a small pair of tweezers If the switches are still not visible remove the grey bezel It is attached to the chassis with 32 small screws 18 on the front and 14 on the bottom Figure 196 Zoning Configuration Piano Switches Behind Bezel Piano Switches 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 179 Zoning Configuration Procedure 4 Verify that the piano switches are correctly set For system with 5 disk enclosures zoning configuration 1 the left most piano switch should be up and the rest down This divides the disk slots into two logical enclosures For system with 10 or 20 disk enclosures zoning configuration 0 all the piano switches should be down
288. vd 0 lun 0 PRESENTATION 0 OID 0x0x20110000 creation STATUS Success 0x0 To simply present the virtual disk to all host ports for both controllers promiscuous mode use this command APPLICATION CREATE PRESENTATION VIRTUAL_DISK lt vd id gt HOST ALL Use the APPLICATION CREATE PRESENTATION command to configure other presentations as needed To display the current settings enter the command Figure 66 APPLICATION SHOW PRESENTATION Figure 66 Show Current Presentations RAIDS app show presentation Channel Mask Controller 0 Controller 1 Pres Host Host VD Home Read RP O RP 1 RP O RP 1 Index Name Index Index LUN Only Only 0123 0123 0123 0123 00000 serverl portl 00000 00000 000 OFF R W E Total Presentations 1 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 49 Configuring the SFA10000 2712 1 Special Considerations for MAC OS Apple s Mac OS X Server does not adhere to the FC specification with regards to node naming Apple expects the node name to vary from port to port while the FC specification calls for it to remain constant A mode setting is provided to force the node name to be unique on a given client channel Fibre Channel port This mode can be set for one or more client channels While the feature is aimed at Mac SANs it can also be used for connections to heterogeneous client SANs When creating the host specify the OSTYPE to
289. view the advanced disk information or attempt to locate a disk this shows that only one controller sees the disk Therefore a controller is down or another hardware issue exists somewhere 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 110 Physical Disks Menu 4 4 2 Locate Disks To locate a disk in the enclosure select Physical Disk gt Locate Disks In the Locate screen Figure 130 click to select the disk The lower half of the Locate screen displays the disk slot into which the disk is installed Click LOCATE to flash the status LED of the disk module Figure 130 Locate Disks Screen PHYSICAL SPEED POOL PD MEMBER SPARE capacity DISK ENCL VENDOR PRODUCT INDEX EK OD RPM NAME OEALTH STATE State POOL GB SLOT OSURE DD PRODUCTID Revision SERIAL NUMBER 144 0x25ae0090 SATA 7200 poz GOOD READY NORMAL 1863 1 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1171YAGR63DS TA 7200 peer GOSH READY NORMAL 1883 2 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1170YAGRWEXP 114 0x25900072 SAM 7200 P00 g P READY NORMAL 1883 3 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOA3EA JK1171YAHOHHSN 138 0x25a8008a SATA pool GOGH READY NORMAL 1883 4 1 Hitachi HDS722020ALA330 JKAOABEA JK1171VAGS2URS gj Pool pool 21 Enclosure 1 Slot 1 4 4 3 Remove Disk from Spare Pool If you need to remove a disk from a spare pool select Physical Disks gt Remove from Spare Figure 131 Select the disk and click REMOVE Figure 131 Remove D
290. within the scope of its coverage prohibits the exercise of or is conditioned on the non exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work and under which the third party grants to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you a discriminatory patent license a in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you or copies made from those copies or b primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work unless you entered into that arrangement or that patent license was granted prior to 28 March 2007 Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law 12 No Surrender of Others Freedom If conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not convey it at
291. xx 1s 1 2 grep adapter port 1 scsi qla0 adapter port 210000e08b9d6149 bm dell 09 proc scsi qla2xxx grep adapter port 2 scsi qlal adapter port 210100e08bbd6l49 lsscsi g grep i ddn 1 0 0 1 disk DDN S2A 8500 5 31 dev sdc dev sg2 2 0 0 1 disk DDN S2A 8500 5 31 dev sdg dev sg6 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 77 96 00259 001 cd sys class fc_host Is la total 0 drwxr xr x 4 root root 0 Jul 15 11 47 drwxr xr x 43 root root 0 Jul 15 11 48 drwxr xr x 3 root root 0 Jul 15 11 48 host3 drwxr xr x 3 root root 0 Jul 15 11 48 host4 cd host3 Is la total 0 drwxr xr x 3 roo drwxr xr x 4 roo lrwxrwxrwx 1 root devices r r r 1 roo Ww 1 roo r r r 1 roo r r r 1 roo r r r 1 roo r r r 1 roo r r r 1 roo r r r 1 roo drwxr xr x 2 roo lrwxrwxrwx 1 roo r r r 1 roo r r r 1 roo rw r r 1 roo rw r r 1 roo Ww roo cat port name ic Cr fttt cf ct cr oe ct er ct och ch oct oct ct Loo roo roo pcid roo roo roo roo roo Loo roo roo roo roo LOO roo roo roo roo cr ctet rr re ct ct re ch rt etet ero et Oo cr oo Example for Linux system without driver loaded 0 Jul 15 11 48 0 Jul 15 11 47 0 Jul 15 11 47 device gt 00 00 0000 00 04 0 0000 0a 00 0 host3 4096 Jul 17 15 31 fabric_name 4096 Jul 17 15 31 issue_lip
292. y in the event of a single disk loss in the storage pool In RAID 6 the capacity of two disks is reserved for parity allowing data recovery if either one or two disks are down in a storage pool In RAID 1 the capacity of one disk is used for data duplication A single RAID 1 storage pool can be configured with 2 disks A single RAID 5 storage pool can be configured using 5 or 9 disks A single RAID 6 storage pool can be configured using 6 or 10 disks NOTE Itis NOT recommended to configure storage pools with physical disks of different capacity as the SFA10000 will use the lower capacity for all disks and space will be wasted A virtual disk is the storage unit presented to any attached host Virtual disks allocate space in 8 GiB increments For example 16 GiB of storage space will be allocated when creating a virtual disk of 10 GiB The disks in the system are categorized into one of the following pools e Unassigned Pool By default all the disks or replacement disks are initially allocated to this pool When a disk has failed or been released from a spare pool for example it is also moved to this pool e Storage Pool sometimes referred to as a RAID group A collection of 2 to 10 disks ideally of the same capacity and type e Spare Pool This type of pool contains disk s that can be used as spare disks in one or more storage pools 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 35 21
293. y the connection its Node Port WWN name to the host object You may use the following techniques e Utilize the physical sticker tag information on the HBA e Connect a single host at a time and all its connections to the subsystem to the subsystem direct connect or via a switch identify their WWNs as a discovered initiator then a proceed to plug in subsequent hosts noting their WWNs e Utilize a host based FC Adapter utility such as HBAnyware for Emulex HBAs Figure 88 or SANsurfer for QLogic HBAs Figure 89 Figure 88 HBAnyware Screen Cm sere P 10 00 00 05 16 90 73 A6 E sais Port 0 10 00 00 00 09 81 34 46 CO TEST D10 a Port 1 10 00 00 00 09 81 34 47 CO TEST D10 Discovery Information Figure 89 SANsurfer FC HBA Manager Screen SaNsurfer FC HBA Manager File Host View Settings Wizards Help o Ta amp FF B orde Connect Configure App Events HBA Events Collect Monitor Diags Refresh FCICNA HBA Parameters I Utilities i L 1 18 sanwaming IE ter Hostname co tast c06 0 32 30 5Warning HBA Port Selection 0 QLE2462 h rer bless Naming Hostname co test d06 0 32 30 6 Node Name 20 00 00 1B 32 0E AB E0 ort 1 Loop Down A 42 0 E Fort 2 Lcop Down HBA Model GLE2462 Port Name 21 00 00 18 32 0B AB E0 HBA Port 1 Port ID 00 00 00 Select Settings section HBA Parameters Example for Linux system with driver loaded example of QLogic cd proc scsi qla2x
294. y to check the status of the UPDATE e When you SCP the Consolidated Download File DDN to the firmware directory it must be copied to the PRIMARY controller Since the PRIMARY may change it is probably best to copy it to BOTH controllers If SHOW PD UPDATE FIRMWARE PROGRESS reports status JS_ES_PD_DL_UCODE_OPEN_FAILED for a physical disk the most likely cause is that the file was not copied to the PRIMARY controller Online physical disk firmware update is not currently supported Therefore make sure that there are no rebuilds initializations or host I O operations being done during the UPDATE PD operation This is enforced by making sure the user has issued the SET SUBSYSTEM OFFLINE command before allowing an UPDATE PD command In order to cause the new physical disk firmware to start being used you must power cycle the enclosure in which the physical disk is installed In the SFA10000 it is best to do this by doing a SHUTDOWN SUBSYSTEM followed by power cycling the enclosure 96 00259 001 DataDirect Networks SFA10000 10000E V1 4 2 User Guide 134 5 4 1 5 4 2 Firmware Update Displaying Current Firmware Version The SHOW CONTROLLER lt id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES and SHOW ENCLOSURE lt id gt ALL ATTRIBUTES commands display version information of the SFA10000 s hardware and firmware Figure 166 Figure 166 show Controller Information Screen RAID 0 show controller 0 all Index 0 OID 0x38000000 Firmware

DDN SFA10000/10000E V1.4.2 User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents